PAC SecureNet User Guide - Eurotech Security Systems PLC

PAC SecureNet
User Guide
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 Nov 2008
PAC
A Stanley Security Solutions Business
1 Park Gate Close, Bredbury, Stockport, SK6 2SZ, England
Tel: +44 (0) 161 406 3400. Fax: +44 (0) 161 430 8658
www.pac.co.uk

Version Date Details
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 ii
Issue Record
2.00 Mar 04 Administration Software 2.0 helpfile
2.10 Jul 04 Keyholder search updated and event archiving added. Magstripe
specification moved to customisation. Encoder added
2.20 Nov 04 Lift control added. CCTV added.
2.21 Jan 05 Technical support telephone number updated. Bolt door overrides time
profile.
2.60 Jul 05 IP Address Configuration of 500, 512IP and 2200IP; 2200 local alarms
added
2.61 Nov 05 All facilities included in one document
3.10 Aug 06 AEM, Multiple Org Units, Muster, Audit Trail, etc. added
3.11 Dec 06 PIN change at door added, static address for IP, legacy PIN readers
only for legacy controllers
3.20 Feb 08 Tear–off tabs; ‘Public’ access groups; Visual notification; Event log
changes; Keyboard controls for PTZ in CCTV. Organisation unit reports.
Keyholder events highlighting.
3.21 Jun 08 Master Override Input clarified; Area names recommendation; Report
filtering note
3.22 Nov 08 32 controllers on a direct channel. UI.exe now PACUI.exe. Link to
knowledge database added.

Version 3.22 Nov 2008
Changes are periodically made to the product and these changes will be incorporated into new
editions of this manual. Stanley Security Solutions shall not be liable for errors contained herein
or for any consequential damages connected with the use of this material.
Copyright and Protective Notices
1. The copyright of this document and the associated drawings is the property of Stanley
Security Solutions, and is issued on condition that it is not copied, reprinted or reproduced,
nor its contents disclosed, either wholly or in part, without the consent in writing of, or in
accordance with the conditions of a contract with Stanley Security Solutions.
2. The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other
protective rights of Stanley Security Solutions, or others.
3. Performance figures and data quoted in this document are typical, and must be specifically
confirmed by Stanley Security Solutions before they become applicable to any tender, order
or contract.
Training and Technical Support ( only)
Training courses covering the installation and use of all products are regularly held at PAC
Stockport. For further information on course availability, or to discuss your specific
requirements, contact the Training Manager at the address below.
It is strongly recommended that any persons installing or commissioning PAC products
attend a suitable training course beforehand.
Technical Support for all products is available during normal office hours. This service is
provided primarily for the use of trained engineers.
End users of PAC products should first of all contact their installation or maintenance
company before contacting PAC.
Further information is given in 17409 Technical Support and Training Information.
Knowledge database available after registration: www.pactechinfo.co.uk.
PAC
A Stanley Security Solutions Business
1 Park Gate Close
Bredbury
Stockport
SK6 2SZ
England
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 iii

IMPORTANT:
When installing the hardware the following should be noted:
HEALTH AND SAFETY
Installation must be wired in accordance with National Wiring Regulations (BS7671, IEE
National Wiring Regulations in the UK). Failure to do so can result in injury or death by
electric shock.
It must also comply with any local Fire, Health and Safety regulations. A secured door
that may be part of an escape route from an area must be fitted with:
• A fail-safe lock (A) so that the door will be released if the power fails. Ideally a
magnetic lock should be used as these are less likely to jam or seize.
• A normally-closed break-glass or manual pull (B) in the lock supply wiring so that in
an emergency the fail-safe lock can be immediately depowered.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 iv
B
The controller must be earthed.
Isolate the controller power supply before working on the controller.
Cabling
The cabling used in the access control systems (e.g. reader cables) are not prone to electrical
interference. However, you should avoid routing cable close to heavy load switching cables and
equipment. If this is unavoidable, cross the cable at right angles every 3.3-6.6ft/1-2m to reduce
the interference.
ESD Precautions
The 500 series of controllers contain static-sensitive devices; an earth grounding strap should
be worn when maintaining a running system.
RFID Devices
As similar RFID technology is now widely used in a number of other industries, for example
automotive immobilisers, it is possible that interaction between your access control ID and other
devices may cause one or the other to function incorrectly. Should you suspect that you have
experienced such a problem the solution is to separate your access control ID from other RFID
devices.
Lithium Batteries
There is a danger of explosion if lithium batteries are incorrectly replaced or handled. Please
read carefully the following guidelines. Failure to do so can result in injury.
1. Take steps to ensure that the batteries are never short circuited.
2. Always store the batteries separately in non-conducting materials.
3. Do not place lithium batteries with normal waste collections; dispose of them correctly.
For information on the disposal of used lithium batteries and your local disposal sites, call the
Environment Agency Helpline (UK only) on 08459 333111.
A

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 v
Table of Contents
1. Introduction to Help File....................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Displaying Help Information .............................................................................................. 1
1.2 Tab Area Facilities............................................................................................................. 1
1.3 Toolbar Facilities ............................................................................................................... 1
1.4 Browse Facilities ............................................................................................................... 2
2. Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 3
2.1 Administration Software Specifications............................................................................. 3
2.1.1 System Limits........................................................................................................... 3
2.1.2 Administration Features ........................................................................................... 4
2.2 Hardware Specifications ................................................................................................... 5
2.2.1 500 Specifications.................................................................................................... 5
2.2.2 512 Specifications.................................................................................................... 6
2.2.3 520/530 I/O Controllers............................................................................................ 7
3. Hardware Installation............................................................................................................ 8
3.1 500 Series ......................................................................................................................... 8
3.2 1100/2100/2200 Series ..................................................................................................... 8
4. Administration Software....................................................................................................... 9
4.1.1 Introduction to the Administration Software ............................................................. 9
4.1.2 Installation ................................................................................................................ 9
4.1.3 Updates.................................................................................................................. 10
4.2 Access Control Overview ................................................................................................ 11
4.2.1 System Design....................................................................................................... 11
4.2.1.1 Access Types................................................................................................. 11
4.2.1.2 System Design............................................................................................... 11
4.2.1.3 System Plan................................................................................................... 12
4.2.1.4 Hardware Configuration using 500 Channel ................................................. 13
4.2.1.5 Hardware Configuration using Offline Channel ............................................. 14
4.2.2 Simple Example ..................................................................................................... 15
4.2.2.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 15
4.2.2.2 Define the Areas ............................................................................................ 15
4.2.3 Add the 500 TCP/IP channel ................................................................................. 16
4.2.3.1 Add and Probe the Controller ........................................................................ 16
4.2.3.2 Define the Holiday Profiles ............................................................................ 16
4.2.3.3 Define the Time/Mode Profiles ...................................................................... 17
4.2.3.4 Update the Doors........................................................................................... 18
4.2.3.5 Define Access Groups ................................................................................... 19
4.2.3.6 Add Keyholders.............................................................................................. 19
4.2.3.7 Add Operators................................................................................................ 19
4.2.3.8 Download Database to the Controller............................................................ 20
4.3 Administration Software Tools ........................................................................................ 21
4.3.1 Configure Device IP Addresses............................................................................. 21
4.3.2 Help........................................................................................................................ 22
4.3.3 Release Notes ....................................................................................................... 22
4.3.4 Restore Database .................................................................................................. 22
4.3.5 Service Manager.................................................................................................... 22
4.3.6 Upgrade Database................................................................................................. 23
4.3.7 Application Software .............................................................................................. 23
4.4 Administration Software Overview .................................................................................. 24
4.4.1 Login ...................................................................................................................... 24

4.4.2 Administration Software Window ........................................................................... 25
4.4.3 Welcome Screen / System Summary .................................................................... 26
4.4.4 Menus .................................................................................................................... 27
4.4.5 Toolbar ...................................................................................................................32
4.4.6 Explorer Bar ........................................................................................................... 33
4.4.7 Status Bar .............................................................................................................. 34
4.4.8 List View.................................................................................................................34
4.4.9 Property Page ........................................................................................................ 35
4.4.10 Logoff ...................................................................................................................36
4.5 Organisation Options....................................................................................................... 37
4.5.1 Customisation ........................................................................................................ 37
4.5.2 System Settings ..................................................................................................... 37
4.5.3 Card Format........................................................................................................... 38
4.5.3.1 Proximity Reader ........................................................................................... 39
4.5.3.2 Magnetic Stripe .............................................................................................. 39
4.5.3.3 Wiegand (2601 format) .................................................................................. 41
4.5.3.4 Adding or Editing a Card Format ................................................................... 42
4.5.4 Event Archiving ...................................................................................................... 43
4.5.5 Alarm Responses................................................................................................... 44
4.5.6 System Access....................................................................................................... 44
4.5.7 Organisational Unit Details .................................................................................... 44
4.5.8 Access....................................................................................................................45
4.5.9 Custom Labels ....................................................................................................... 45
4.5.10 Categories............................................................................................................ 46
4.5.11 Keyholder Extra Details ....................................................................................... 47
4.5.12 Alarms .................................................................................................................. 47
4.6 Organisational Units........................................................................................................49
4.6.1 Organisational Units List........................................................................................ 49
4.6.2 Organisational Unit Details .................................................................................... 49
4.7 Keyholders ...................................................................................................................... 50
4.7.1 Keyholder List View ............................................................................................... 50
4.7.2 Keyholder Property Page....................................................................................... 50
4.7.2.1 Keyholder Details........................................................................................... 50
4.7.2.2 Keyholder Personal Details ........................................................................... 52
4.7.2.3 Keyholder Keys.............................................................................................. 53
4.7.2.4 Keyholder Access Groups ............................................................................. 54
4.7.2.5 Keyholder Guest Access ............................................................................... 54
4.7.2.6 Keyholder Personal Access........................................................................... 55
4.7.2.7 Keyholder Notes ............................................................................................ 56
4.7.2.8 Keyholder Extra Information .......................................................................... 56
4.7.2.9 Keyholder Events........................................................................................... 56
4.7.2.10 Keyholder Area Usage................................................................................. 57
4.7.3 Add/Update/Delete a Keyholder ............................................................................ 58
4.8 Guests ............................................................................................................................. 59
4.9 Operators ........................................................................................................................ 60
4.9.1 Operator List View ................................................................................................. 60
4.9.2 Operator Property Page......................................................................................... 60
4.9.2.1 Operator Details............................................................................................. 60
4.9.2.2 Operator Privileges ........................................................................................ 61
4.9.2.3 Operator Alarm Viewer .................................................................................. 62
4.9.3 Add/Update/Delete an Operator ............................................................................ 63
4.9.4 Specifying a Keyholder as an Operator ................................................................. 64
4.10 Time & Mode Profiles.................................................................................................... 65
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 vi

4.10.1 Time & Mode Profile List View............................................................................. 65
4.10.2 Time & Mode Profile Property Page .................................................................... 65
4.10.2.1 Daily Time Profiles....................................................................................... 65
4.10.2.2 Weekly Time Profiles ................................................................................... 66
4.10.2.3 Mode Profiles ............................................................................................... 67
4.10.2.4 Area Mode Profile Access Options.............................................................. 68
4.10.2.5 Holiday Time Profile..................................................................................... 68
4.10.3 Add/Update/Delete a Time/Mode Profile ............................................................. 70
4.11 Holiday Profiles ............................................................................................................. 71
4.11.1 Holiday Profile List View ...................................................................................... 71
4.11.2 Holiday Profile Property Page.............................................................................. 71
4.11.3 Add/Update/Delete a Holiday Profile ................................................................... 72
4.12 Areas ............................................................................................................................. 73
4.12.1 Area List View ...................................................................................................... 73
4.12.2 Area Property Page ............................................................................................. 73
4.12.2.1 Area Details ................................................................................................. 73
4.12.2.2 Area Appearance......................................................................................... 74
4.12.2.3 Area Alarm Management............................................................................. 74
4.12.2.4 Area Alarm Definitions ................................................................................. 75
4.12.2.5 Area Alarm Points........................................................................................ 75
4.12.2.6 Area Outputs................................................................................................ 76
4.12.2.7 Area Management ....................................................................................... 77
4.12.2.8 Area Security Level...................................................................................... 78
4.12.3 Add/Update/Delete an Area................................................................................. 78
4.13 Access Groups..............................................................................................................79
4.13.1 Access Group List View....................................................................................... 79
4.13.2 Access Group Property Page .............................................................................. 79
4.13.2.1 Access Group Details .................................................................................. 79
4.13.2.2 Access Group Access.................................................................................. 79
4.13.2.3 Access Group Advanced ............................................................................. 80
4.13.3 Add/Update/Delete an Access Group.................................................................. 81
4.14 Hardware....................................................................................................................... 82
4.14.1 Hardware List View .............................................................................................. 82
4.14.2 Channel Property Page........................................................................................ 85
4.14.2.1 Channel Details............................................................................................ 85
4.14.2.2 Channel Areas ............................................................................................. 86
4.14.2.3 Channel 500................................................................................................. 86
4.14.2.4 Channel Alarm Management....................................................................... 87
4.14.2.5 Channel Settings.......................................................................................... 87
4.14.2.6 Channel Dialup ............................................................................................ 88
4.14.2.7 Channel Dialback......................................................................................... 89
4.14.2.8 Channel Layout............................................................................................ 90
4.14.2.9 Add/Update/Delete a Channel..................................................................... 90
4.14.3 Controller Property Page ..................................................................................... 92
4.14.3.1 Controller Details ......................................................................................... 92
4.14.3.2 Controller Information .................................................................................. 93
4.14.3.3 Controller 2100/2200 ................................................................................... 94
4.14.3.4 Controller Doors........................................................................................... 96
4.14.3.5 Controller Inputs........................................................................................... 96
4.14.3.6 Controller Outputs........................................................................................ 99
Manual ..................................................................................................................... 101
Local Area Alarm ..................................................................................................... 101
4.14.3.7 Controller Alarm Management................................................................... 102
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 vii

4.14.3.8 Add/Update/Delete a Controller................................................................. 102
4.14.3.9 Probe/Configure/Unconfigure Controllers.................................................. 103
4.14.3.10 Online Controller Tasks ........................................................................... 104
4.14.4 Offline Channel and Controller Tasks................................................................ 105
4.14.4.1 Download Database to the Controllers using the PC ................................ 105
4.14.4.2 Download Database to the Controllers using the PDA.............................. 106
4.14.4.3 Upload Database from PDA to a PC ......................................................... 106
4.14.5 Lift Property Page .............................................................................................. 107
4.14.5.1 Lift Details .................................................................................................. 107
4.14.5.2 Lift Destinations ......................................................................................... 107
4.14.5.3 Lift Access.................................................................................................. 108
4.14.6 Add/Update/Delete a Lift Reader....................................................................... 109
4.15 Doors........................................................................................................................... 110
4.15.1 Door List View.................................................................................................... 110
4.15.2 Door Property Page ........................................................................................... 110
4.15.2.1 Door Details ............................................................................................... 110
4.15.2.2 Door Access............................................................................................... 111
4.15.2.3 Door Configuration..................................................................................... 112
Controller.................................................................................................................. 115
4.15.2.4 Door Auxiliary IO........................................................................................ 116
4.15.2.5 Door Alarm Management........................................................................... 117
4.15.2.6 Door Security Level ................................................................................... 118
4.15.3 Add/Update/Delete a Door................................................................................. 118
4.16 Video Source............................................................................................................... 119
4.16.1 Video Source List View ...................................................................................... 119
4.16.2 Video Source Property Page ............................................................................. 119
4.16.2.1 Video Source Property Page ..................................................................... 119
4.16.2.2 Add/Update/Delete a Video Source........................................................... 119
4.16.3 Video Sources - Configure................................................................................. 120
4.16.3.1 Configuring Video Sources........................................................................ 120
4.16.3.2 Video Sources - General Tab .................................................................... 120
Address.................................................................................................................... 120
4.16.3.3 Video Sources - Presets Tab..................................................................... 121
4.16.3.4 Presets Tab - General Tab ........................................................................ 121
4.16.3.5 Presets Tab - View Tab ............................................................................. 122
4.16.3.6 Presets Tab - Alarm Points........................................................................ 122
4.17 Reports........................................................................................................................ 123
4.17.1 Report Facilities ................................................................................................. 123
4.17.2 Reports Provided ............................................................................................... 124
4.17.3 Report Search Parameters ................................................................................ 126
4.17.4 Export a Report.................................................................................................. 127
4.17.5 Add a Report to Favourites................................................................................ 128
4.17.6 Add a Custom Report ........................................................................................ 129
5. Image Capture ................................................................................................................... 130
5.1 Image Capture Introduction........................................................................................... 130
5.2 Using the Image Capture Utility .................................................................................... 130
5.3 Capture Source ............................................................................................................. 130
5.4 Preview Window............................................................................................................ 131
6. ID Card Designer ............................................................................................................... 132
6.1 Card Designer Introduction ........................................................................................... 132
6.1.1 Displaying the Card Designer .............................................................................. 132
6.1.2 Interactive Map..................................................................................................... 132
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 viii

6.2 Card Designer Menus ................................................................................................... 132
6.2.1 Design Menu........................................................................................................ 132
6.2.2 Edit Menu ............................................................................................................. 132
6.2.3 View Menu ........................................................................................................... 133
6.2.4 Help Menu............................................................................................................ 133
6.3 Toolbar, Browser and Status Bar .................................................................................. 133
6.3.1 Card Designer Toolbar......................................................................................... 133
6.3.2 Card Designer Browser........................................................................................ 134
6.3.3 Card Designer Status Bar.................................................................................... 134
6.4 Design Regions ............................................................................................................. 134
6.4.1 Add Items Region ................................................................................................ 134
6.4.1.1 Creating Designs ......................................................................................... 135
6.4.1.2 ID-Card Design Overview ............................................................................ 135
6.4.2 Card Face Region................................................................................................ 135
6.4.2.1 Selecting Card Faces .................................................................................. 135
6.4.2.2 Mouse Coordinates...................................................................................... 135
6.4.2.3 Card Face Properties................................................................................... 135
6.4.2.4 Rulers........................................................................................................... 135
6.4.2.5 Viewing Card Face Properties..................................................................... 135
6.4.2.6 Editing Card Face Properties....................................................................... 135
6.4.3 Properties Region ................................................................................................ 136
6.4.3.1 Editing Item Properties ................................................................................ 136
6.4.3.2 Update / Exit ................................................................................................ 136
6.4.4 Buttons Region..................................................................................................... 136
6.4.4.1 Assign a Name to this Item.......................................................................... 136
6.4.4.2 Update Button .............................................................................................. 136
6.4.4.3 Exit Button.................................................................................................... 136
6.5 Card Design Overview .................................................................................................. 137
6.5.1 Drawing and Placing Items .................................................................................. 137
6.5.1.1 Dragging and Dropping................................................................................ 137
6.5.1.2 Selecting and Clicking ................................................................................. 137
6.5.1.3 Fixed Shape Items....................................................................................... 137
6.5.1.4 Variable Shape Items .................................................................................. 138
6.5.1.5 Line .............................................................................................................. 138
6.5.2 Editing Properties................................................................................................. 138
6.5.3 Grouping and Ungrouping.................................................................................... 138
6.5.4 Select Mode ......................................................................................................... 139
6.5.5 Move, Resize and Delete..................................................................................... 139
6.5.6 Printing Double-Sided ID Cards on a Single-Sided ID Card Printer.................... 140
6.5.6.1 Printing from the ID Card Designer ............................................................. 140
6.5.6.2 Batch Printing ID Cards from Keyholder Module......................................... 140
6.6 Item Properties .............................................................................................................. 141
6.6.1 Multiple Item Properties ....................................................................................... 141
6.6.2 Group Item ........................................................................................................... 141
6.6.3 Shape Item Properties ......................................................................................... 141
6.6.4 Image Item / Photo Item / Signature Item Properties........................................... 142
6.6.5 Line Item Properties............................................................................................. 142
6.6.6 Text Item / Text Data Item Properties.................................................................. 142
6.7 Individual Properties...................................................................................................... 143
6.7.1 Name Property..................................................................................................... 143
6.7.2 Units Properties ................................................................................................... 143
6.7.3 Background Properties ........................................................................................ 143
6.7.4 Snap Properties ................................................................................................... 143
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 ix

6.7.5 Holopatch / Magstripe / Smart Card Properties................................................... 143
6.7.6 Orientation............................................................................................................ 144
6.7.7 X, Y, Width and Height Properties ....................................................................... 144
6.7.8 Aspect Lock Property........................................................................................... 145
6.7.9 Anchor and Angle Properties............................................................................... 145
6.7.9.1 Anchor.......................................................................................................... 145
6.7.9.2 Angle............................................................................................................ 145
6.7.10 Transparency Property ...................................................................................... 145
6.7.11 Shape Properties ............................................................................................... 146
6.7.12 Text Properties................................................................................................... 146
6.7.12.1 Font............................................................................................................ 146
6.7.12.2 Multi-line..................................................................................................... 146
6.7.12.3 Colour ........................................................................................................ 146
6.7.13 Line Properties................................................................................................... 146
6.7.13.1 Line Width .................................................................................................. 146
6.7.13.2 Colour ........................................................................................................ 146
6.7.14 Image Property................................................................................................... 146
6.7.15 Shadow Properties............................................................................................. 147
6.7.16 Colour Properties ............................................................................................... 147
6.7.17 Data Field Property ............................................................................................ 147
6.8 Group Item Properties................................................................................................... 148
6.8.1 Group Item Properties.......................................................................................... 148
6.8.2 Creating a Group ................................................................................................. 148
6.8.3 Ungrouping a Group ............................................................................................ 148
6.8.4 Editing Group Properties...................................................................................... 148
6.8.5 Resizing a Group ................................................................................................. 148
6.9 Context Menus .............................................................................................................. 148
6.9.1 Card Face ............................................................................................................ 148
6.9.2 Ruler..................................................................................................................... 149
6.9.3 Multiple Items ....................................................................................................... 149
6.9.4 Group ................................................................................................................... 149
6.9.5 Single Items ......................................................................................................... 149
6.9.6 Image ................................................................................................................... 149
6.9.7 Line ...................................................................................................................... 149
6.10 Common Items ............................................................................................................ 150
6.10.1 Align to Grid ....................................................................................................... 150
6.10.2 Docking Items .................................................................................................... 150
6.10.2.1 Docking Items ............................................................................................ 150
6.10.2.2 Docking Text Data Items ........................................................................... 150
6.10.2.3 Moving Docked Items ................................................................................ 150
6.10.2.4 Undocking items ........................................................................................ 151
6.10.2.5 Preventing Docking.................................................................................... 151
6.10.3 Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face ....................................................... 151
6.10.4 Zoom Function ................................................................................................... 151
6.10.5 Measurement ..................................................................................................... 152
7. Alarm Map Designer.......................................................................................................... 153
7.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................... 153
7.1.1 Starting Alarm Map Designer............................................................................... 153
7.1.2 Alarm Designer Interactive Map .......................................................................... 153
7.1.3 Alarm Map Designer Layout ................................................................................ 153
7.1.4 Making a Map....................................................................................................... 153
7.2 Alarm Map Designer Glossary ...................................................................................... 153
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 x

7.3 Alarm Map Designer Interactive Map............................................................................ 154
7.4 Alarm Map Designer Menus.......................................................................................... 155
7.4.1 Design Menu........................................................................................................ 155
7.4.2 Edit Menu ............................................................................................................. 155
7.4.3 View Menu ........................................................................................................... 155
7.4.4 Help Menu............................................................................................................ 155
7.5 Alarm Map Designer Toolbar ........................................................................................ 156
7.6 Add Items Region.......................................................................................................... 156
7.6.1 General Tab ......................................................................................................... 156
7.6.2 Areas Tab............................................................................................................. 157
7.6.3 Inputs Tab ............................................................................................................ 157
7.6.4 Outputs Tab ......................................................................................................... 157
7.6.5 CCTV Tab ............................................................................................................ 158
7.6.6 Alarm Points Tab.................................................................................................. 158
Controllers................................................................................................................ 158
Doors........................................................................................................................ 158
7.6.7 Further information on the Add Items Region...................................................... 158
7.6.7.1 Changing Add Items Views.......................................................................... 158
7.6.7.2 Drawing and Creating Maps ........................................................................ 159
7.6.7.3 Map Design Overview.................................................................................. 159
7.7 Design Editor Region .................................................................................................... 159
7.7.1 Design Editor Region Introduction ....................................................................... 159
7.7.1.1 Adding / Deleting Map Pages ...................................................................... 159
7.7.1.2 Drawing and Placing Items .......................................................................... 159
7.7.1.3 Editing Map Designs.................................................................................... 159
7.7.1.4 Properties..................................................................................................... 159
7.7.1.5 Map Making Hints ........................................................................................ 159
7.7.2 Map Making and Editing ...................................................................................... 159
7.7.2.1 Map Making Hints ........................................................................................ 159
7.7.2.2 Adding/Deleting/Copying Pages.................................................................. 160
7.7.2.3 Alarm Viewer and Map Design Editor.......................................................... 160
7.7.2.4 Editing Properties......................................................................................... 161
7.7.2.5 Page Tabs.................................................................................................... 161
7.7.2.6 Group Item ................................................................................................... 162
7.7.2.7 Grouping and Ungrouping ........................................................................... 162
7.7.2.8 Select Mode ................................................................................................. 163
7.7.2.9 Move/Resize/Delete Items........................................................................... 163
7.7.2.10 Drawing and Placing Items ........................................................................ 164
7.7.3 Context Menus..................................................................................................... 165
7.7.3.1 Multiple Items............................................................................................... 165
7.7.3.2 Page............................................................................................................. 165
7.7.3.3 Ruler ............................................................................................................ 165
7.7.3.4 Group ........................................................................................................... 165
7.7.3.5 Single Items ................................................................................................. 165
7.7.3.6 Image ........................................................................................................... 166
7.7.3.7 Line .............................................................................................................. 166
7.8 Properties Region.......................................................................................................... 166
7.8.1 Item Properties..................................................................................................... 166
7.8.1.1 Multiple Item Properties ............................................................................... 166
7.8.1.2 Group Item Properties ................................................................................. 166
7.8.1.3 Shape Item Properties ................................................................................. 167
7.8.1.4 Image Item Properties ................................................................................. 167
7.8.1.5 Line Item Properties..................................................................................... 168
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xi

7.8.1.6 Text Item Properties..................................................................................... 168
7.8.1.7 View Item Properties.................................................................................... 168
7.8.1.8 Button Item Properties ................................................................................. 169
7.8.1.9 Alarm Area Properties ................................................................................. 169
7.8.1.10 Alarm Point/Output Properties ................................................................... 169
7.8.1.11 Video Source Properties............................................................................ 170
7.8.2 Individual Properties ............................................................................................ 170
7.8.2.1 Name Property............................................................................................. 170
7.8.2.2 Tool tip Property........................................................................................... 170
7.8.2.3 Action and Set Action................................................................................... 170
7.8.2.4 X, Y, Height and Width Properties............................................................... 170
7.8.2.5 Resolution and Units Properties .................................................................. 171
7.8.2.6 Background Properties ................................................................................ 171
7.8.2.7 Aspect Lock Property................................................................................... 171
7.8.2.8 Anchor and Angle Property.......................................................................... 171
7.8.2.9 Display Mode ............................................................................................... 172
7.8.2.10 Transparency Property .............................................................................. 172
7.8.2.11 Text Property ............................................................................................. 172
7.8.2.12 Font Property ............................................................................................. 172
7.8.2.13 Multi-line Property...................................................................................... 172
7.8.2.14 Colour Property.......................................................................................... 172
7.8.2.15 Line Width Property ................................................................................... 173
7.8.2.16 Image Property .......................................................................................... 173
7.8.2.17 Shadow, Shadow X, Shadow Y and Shadow Density............................... 173
7.8.2.18 Snap Grid, Snap Grid Size, Snap Grid Colour .......................................... 173
7.9 Status Bar...................................................................................................................... 174
8. Alarm Viewer...................................................................................................................... 175
8.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................... 175
8.2 Alarm Viewer Glossary.................................................................................................. 175
8.3 Interactive Map.............................................................................................................. 176
8.4 Alarm Viewer Menus ..................................................................................................... 177
8.4.1 File Menu ............................................................................................................. 177
8.4.2 View Menu ........................................................................................................... 177
8.4.3 Visual Notification ................................................................................................ 178
8.4.4 Active Alarms / Event Log / Alarm History Menu ................................................. 178
8.4.5 Alarm Board Menu ............................................................................................... 178
8.4.6 Areas Menu.......................................................................................................... 178
8.4.7 Map Menu ............................................................................................................ 180
8.4.8 CCTV Menu ......................................................................................................... 180
8.4.9 Incident Report Details......................................................................................... 180
8.4.10 Context Menu..................................................................................................... 181
8.5 Alarm Viewer Toolbars.................................................................................................. 181
8.5.1 Alarm Viewer Toolbar .......................................................................................... 181
8.5.2 Active Alarm Toolbar............................................................................................ 181
8.5.3 Event Log Viewer Toolbar.................................................................................... 182
8.5.4 Alarm History Toolbar .......................................................................................... 182
8.5.5 CCTV Region Toolbar.......................................................................................... 183
8.6 Alarm/Event Region ...................................................................................................... 183
8.6.1 Active Alarms ....................................................................................................... 183
8.6.1.1 Alarm Information......................................................................................... 183
8.6.1.2 Viewing Associated Active Alarm Information ............................................. 184
8.6.2 Managing Alarms ................................................................................................. 184
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xii

8.6.3 Acknowledge Commands .................................................................................... 184
8.6.3.1 Acknowledge................................................................................................ 184
8.6.3.2 Acknowledge All........................................................................................... 185
8.6.3.3 Acknowledge Selected Command............................................................... 185
8.6.4 Silence Commands.............................................................................................. 185
8.6.4.1 Silence All .................................................................................................... 185
8.6.5 Event Log Viewer................................................................................................. 185
8.6.5.1 Event Information List .................................................................................. 185
8.6.5.2 Viewing Additional Active Alarm Information ............................................... 186
8.6.6 Alarm History........................................................................................................ 186
8.6.6.1 Alarm History Column Headings.................................................................. 186
8.6.6.2 Viewing Additional Active Alarm Information ............................................... 186
8.7 Areas Region................................................................................................................. 187
8.7.1 Areas Board ......................................................................................................... 187
8.7.1.1 Viewing Associated Alarm Area Information ............................................... 187
8.7.1.2 Viewing Additional Alarm Area Information ................................................. 187
8.7.2 Issuing Commands to Areas................................................................................ 187
8.7.2.1 Toolbar......................................................................................................... 187
8.7.2.2 Areas Menu.................................................................................................. 187
8.7.2.3 Context Menu............................................................................................... 187
8.7.2.4 Areas Commands ........................................................................................ 188
8.8 Alarm Board Region...................................................................................................... 189
8.8.1 Alarm Board ......................................................................................................... 189
8.8.1.1 Alarm Viewer Icons...................................................................................... 189
8.8.1.2 Alarm Area / Alarm Point Icon States .......................................................... 189
8.8.1.3 Viewing Additional Alarm Point Information................................................. 190
8.8.2 Issuing Commands to Alarm Points..................................................................... 191
8.8.2.1 General commands ..................................................................................... 191
8.8.2.2 Door only commands................................................................................... 191
8.8.2.3 Toolbar......................................................................................................... 191
8.8.2.4 Alarm Board Menu....................................................................................... 191
8.8.2.5 Context Menu............................................................................................... 191
8.8.2.6 Alarm Input Commands ............................................................................... 191
8.9 Map Region ................................................................................................................... 192
8.9.1 Multi-Page Maps .................................................................................................. 192
8.9.2 Viewing Alarms .................................................................................................... 192
8.9.3 Viewing the Map................................................................................................... 192
8.9.4 Issuing Commands to Areas, Alarm Points and Outputs .................................... 192
8.10 CCTV Region .............................................................................................................. 193
8.10.1 Expanding Video Sources.................................................................................. 193
8.10.2 Panning, Tilting and Enlarging........................................................................... 193
8.10.3 CCTV Archive Tools .......................................................................................... 194
8.11 If an Alarm Occurs....................................................................................................... 195
8.11.1 When an alarm occurs....................................................................................... 195
8.11.2 What to do if an alarm occurs.... ........................................................................ 195
8.11.3 How to stop (clear) an alarm.............................................................................. 195
8.11.4 What to do after an alarm... ............................................................................... 195
9. Event Facilities .................................................................................................................. 196
9.1 Event Log ...................................................................................................................... 196
9.1.1.1 Highlighting Events ...................................................................................... 198
9.2 Alarm Events and System Alarms................................................................................. 200
9.3 Alarm Alerts................................................................................................................... 201
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xiii

9.4 Event Archive ................................................................................................................ 202
9.5 Event Archive Restore................................................................................................... 204
9.6 Event to Action .............................................................................................................. 205
9.6.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 205
9.6.2 Event to Action Details......................................................................................... 205
9.6.3 Event to Action Configuration .............................................................................. 205
9.6.4 Configure Send Email .......................................................................................... 207
9.7 Muster and Evacuation.................................................................................................. 208
9.7.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 208
9.7.2 Specifying the Alarm Point for Muster ................................................................. 208
9.7.3 Muster Details ...................................................................................................... 210
9.7.4 Event to Action - 1................................................................................................ 210
9.7.5 Muster Configuration............................................................................................ 211
9.7.6 Event to Action Configuration - 2 ......................................................................... 213
9.7.7 Muster Operation ................................................................................................. 213
10. Other Facilities ................................................................................................................ 215
10.1 Modems....................................................................................................................... 215
10.2 Modem Initialization String .......................................................................................... 216
10.3 Database Backup........................................................................................................ 216
10.4 Import .......................................................................................................................... 217
10.5 Upgrade License ......................................................................................................... 218
10.6 Configure Peripherals ................................................................................................. 219
10.7 Manage Controller Firmware....................................................................................... 220
10.8 Change Password....................................................................................................... 221
10.9 Search for a Keyholder ............................................................................................... 222
10.10 Encode Keycode ....................................................................................................... 223
10.11 Configure Organisations ........................................................................................... 226
10.11.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 226
10.11.2 Multiple Organisation Units Details.................................................................. 227
10.11.2.1 License Upgrades.................................................................................... 227
10.11.2.2 Log-in Screen........................................................................................... 227
10.11.2.3 Tools Options........................................................................................... 227
10.11.2.4 Edit, Add or Delete Org Units .................................................................. 227
10.11.2.5 Guests...................................................................................................... 228
10.11.2.6 Operators ................................................................................................. 228
10.11.2.7 Reports .................................................................................................... 228
10.11.2.8 Alarm Viewer............................................................................................ 228
10.11.2.9 Database Back-Up, Archive and Restore................................................ 228
10.11.3 Multiple Organisation Units Configuration ....................................................... 229
10.11.3.1 User Interface .......................................................................................... 229
10.11.3.2 Database Download ................................................................................ 229
10.11.4 Multiple Organisation Units Configure Actions ................................................ 229
10.11.4.1 Configuring Org Units .............................................................................. 229
10.11.4.2 Login ........................................................................................................ 229
10.11.4.3 Operator Property Page........................................................................... 229
10.11.4.4 Event Log Viewer..................................................................................... 230
10.11.4.5 Guests...................................................................................................... 230
10.11.4.6 Hardware ................................................................................................. 230
10.11.4.7 Alarm Viewer............................................................................................ 230
10.11.4.8 Miscellaneous .......................................................................................... 230
10.12 Audit Trail .................................................................................................................. 232
11. Error Messages ............................................................................................................... 233
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xiv

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xv
Glossary
Access Controller
An access controller determines when a door is unlocked depending on the key code received
from a reader or Request to Exit switch. The type of controller determines how many doors it
can control (e.g. the 512 can control 2 doors using up to 4 readers).
Access Group
An access group is a list of areas to which a keyholder is allowed access. The access may be
restricted to certain times by use of a time profile.
Airlock
An airlock is an area controlled by two or more doors and if one door is open the other(s)
cannot be opened even with a valid key. Closing all doors, allows a single door to be opened
with a valid key.
Alarm Category
An alarm category is a group of alarms defined by a privileged user. Each alarm category has
its own icon and alarm sound.
Anti-Passback
Anti-passback prevents a key being shared. Sharing occurs, for example, when one keyholder
accesses an area and then either holds the door open or passes the key back so that others
can gain entry. When anti-passback is applied to an area, a key that has been used to enter the
area cannot be used to enter the area again until it has been used to exit the area. If passback
is transgressed, it can be reset for the keyholder by an operator with the appropriate privilege;
also a timed reset and/or tailgate reset can be specified for the area.
Alarm Point
An alarm point is an item that generates an alarm when in a specified state (e.g. a door that has
been propped open can generate a 'door left open' alarm).
Alarm
An alarm is an event that requires attention (e.g. a door forced open alarm).
Area
An area has at least one door. The outside is counted as an area because it has a door for
entering/leaving a building.
Buddy Reader
A buddy reader requires two keys to open the door (i.e. two keyholders are required before
entry into an area is allowed).
Bolted Door
A bolted door on a 512 access controller prevents access to all keyholders except those with
bolt door keyholder privilege.
A bolted door on a 1100/2100/2200 series door controller prevents any time profile assigned to
the door from unlocking the door.
Channel
A channel is connection between two items of hardware (see direct channel, door channel, PC
channel, RS-485 channel, and TCP/IP channel).
Controller
See access controller, input controller and output controller.
Diagnostic Code
A 2-byte hexadecimal number that can be mapped to one or more diagnostic messages. 0
indicates that no diagnostic conditions exist.

Door
A door allows or prevents access in and out of an area. Doors may have a reader on each side
to allow access to be controlled in both in and out directions. Other doors may have a reader on
one side and a Request to Exit switch on the other so that a key is not required to leave the
area.
Direct Channel
A direct channel is the connection between controllers and a PC via an RS-232 connection. The
connection is usually via an administration kit.
Dialup Channel
A dialup channel is the connection between controllers and a PC via modems.
Door Channel
A door channel is the connection between a door and a controller. The 512 has two door
channels because it can control two doors. Each door channel can have two readers (in and
out) or one reader and a Request to Exit switch connected to it.
Door Contact
A door contact is a device, usually a magnetic switch, that may be installed on a door to monitor
whether the door is open or closed.
Event
An event is a transaction (does not require attention) or alarm (requires attention) that occurs on
the system. All events are logged by the system. The type of event determines how it is
reported to the operator.
Exit/Entry Out of Hours
Exit/entry out of hours is a facility that prevents a person being trapped, e.g. a keyholder with
limited time only (controlled by a time profile) enters an area with an in and out reader and stays
too long. The keyholder can still exit but an event will be generated.
Fail Full Secure
Fail full secure is a communications failure mode that does not allow entry and exit into an area.
Fail Safe
Fail safe is a communications failure mode that only allows entry and exit into an area for
certain keyholders. For 500 TCP/IP channels, priority keyholders and keyholders that have
used their key are allowed to enter or exit the area. For other channels, priority keyholders and
keyholders that have been downloaded to the controller are allowed to enter and exit the area.
Fail Secure
Fail secure is a communications failure mode that allows entry and exit into an area for priority
keyholders only.
Fail-Safe Lock
A fail-safe lock (or 'power to lock') requires a permanent power supply to keep the door locked,
i.e. in the event of power failure the door would become unlocked.
Fail-Secure Lock
A fail-secure lock (or 'power to unlock') requires power to unlock the door. These can be
dangerous in the event of emergencies such as fires. Always consult Heath and Safety
personnel before fitting a fail-secure lock.
Full Arm Area
A full arm area is an area where all alarm points in the area are armed and all keys (except
those with a privileged access group) are denied access.
Holiday Period
A holiday period consists of a start and end date. A number of holiday periods are assigned to a
holiday profile which can then be included in a time/mode profile to limit access during holiday
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xvi

periods.
Holiday Profile
A holiday profile can be included in a time/mode profile to limit access during holiday periods. A
holiday profile consists of one or more holiday periods that can span multiple days.
Input
An input is a digital state that indicates the state of an electronic switch (e.g. a 2-state input
would indicate closed or open).
Input Controller
An input controller provides end-of-line inputs that can be used to monitor certain conditions
(e.g. a normally closed input could generate an alarm if it went open).
Key
A key is a token, fob or card that when presented to a reader will unlock the door. The door will
only be unlocked if the key is valid (i.e. known to the system, allow access to the area and not
be presented outside a permitted time profile).
Keyholder
A keyholder is a person who has a key. This could be a member of staff or a visitor. The key
allocated to the keyholder will only be valid for specified areas and times (e.g. visitors can be
prevented from entering an area at any time and all areas after a certain date).
Mode Profile
A mode profile can be applied to an area, door or reader to determine its mode (e.g. door locked or
unlocked). A holiday profile can be assigned to a mode profile to limit access during holiday periods.
Offline Controller
An offline controller is not permanently connected to a PC but can be programmed and updated
by a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) or laptop computer that is connected when required. This
should not be confused with an Online Controller that has been put offline.
Online Controller
An online controller is permanently connected to a PC and is automatically updated when changes are
made via the administration software.
Omitted Alarm Point
An omitted alarm point is an alarm point that is not armed when its associated area is armed
and therefore allows the area to be armed even when the alarm point is in alarm (i.e. the area is
said to be partially armed).
Operator
An operator is a keyholder who is allowed to make changes to the database determined by the
operator privileges, e.g. a receptionist can add keyholders but not controllers.
Output
An output is a digital state that controls an output relay (e.g. an output would close or open an
electronic switch depending on specified conditions being detected).
Output Controller
An output controller provides relay outputs that can be used to control certain conditions (e.g. a
siren could be activated if an alarm condition is detected).
Passive Infra Red
A Passive Infra Red (PIR) detector is a motion detector that can be used to detect intruders or
as a Request to Exit switch to automatically open a door when someone approaches it.
PC Channel
A PC channel is the connection between a controller and a PC.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xvii

PIN Reader
A PIN reader is a special type of reader which requires a personal identification number to be
entered in conjunction with a valid key.
Priority Keyholders
Priority keyholders are stored on the appropriate access controller and are therefore allowed to
enter and exit an associated area even if there is a communications failure between the server
and controllers (providing that the communications failure mode has not been set to Fail Full
Secure).
Reader
A reader sends a key code to a controller when a key is presented to it. If the key is valid, an
unlock door signal is sent to the door lock.
Request to Exit Switch
A Request to Exit switch is a switch (or button) that unlocks a door when pressed. A valid key is
not required so anyone can leave the area.
RS-485 Channel
A RS-485 channel is the connection between a server and controllers (or between controllers
on a direct channel).
Security Level
A security level (range 0 to 9) can be assigned to a key to determine which doors it can open or
areas it can access. A door or area is also assigned a security level and the security level of the
key must be equal or greater than the security level of the door or area to allow access.
However, if the security level of the door or area is 0, no access is allowed at any time by any
key.
Tamper Event
An alarm generated when a controller case is tampered with (e.g. broken in to).
TCP/IP Channel
A TCP/IP channel can be a 500 TCP/IP channel (i.e. the Ethernet connection between a PC
and a server) or a Direct TCP/IP channel (i.e. the Ethernet connection between a PC and an
access or door controller).
Time Period
A time period consists of a start time, end time, and one or more days. A number of time
periods are assigned to a time profile which defines when a keyholder can access an area.
Time Profile
A time profile can be applied to a door, keyholder or access group to only allow access during
certain times (e.g. only during office hours). A time profile consists of one or more time periods
that can span multiple days. A holiday profile can be assigned to a time profile to limit access
during holiday periods.
Transaction
A transaction is an event that does not require attention (e.g. a valid keyholder opening a door).
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xviii

1. Introduction to Help File
1.1 Displaying Help Information
To display Administration Software help information:
• Select Help > Contents.
To display context-sensitive help information:
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 1
Introduction to Help File
• Select an area on the Administration Software window and press F1 on the keyboard.
To display the 500 series help information:
• Select Start > Programs > Administration Software Tools > 500 Series Manual
1.2 Tab Area Facilities
To navigate the help information:
• Select the Contents tab and an item in the contents list.
or
• Select the Index tab, enter a keyword, and select an item in the index list.
or
• Select the Search tab, enter a keyword, and select an item in the search list.
or
• Select the Favorites tab and double click an item in the favourites list.
or
• Select an in-text link (indicated by blue text).
To add items to the favourites list:
• Navigate to the required help information, select the Favorites tab, and select Add.
To remove items from the favourites list:
• Select the Favorites tab, select the item in the favourites list, and select Remove.
To display glossary definitions:
• Select the Glossary tab and select an item in the glossary list.
or
• Select an in-text glossary item (indicated by red text); to close the definition, select the
glossary item again.
1.3 Toolbar Facilities
To hide/show the tab area:
• Select the Hide icon and the tab area is closed and the icon changes to Show; to redisplay
the tab area select the Show icon.
To move backwards and forwards in displayed order:
• Select the Back or Forward icon

To display the home page:
• Select the Home icon.
To print a topic:
• Select the Print icon and if no subtopics are displayed in the Contents tab, the Print
window (that allows a printer to be selected) is displayed.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 2
Introduction to Help File
• Select the Print icon and If subtopics are displayed in the Contents tab, the Print Topics
window (that gives the option to display all the subtopics) is displayed before the Print
window.
1.4 Browse Facilities
To move backwards and forwards in table-of-contents order:
• Select the Previous or Next icon.
To display the home page of a main section:
• Select the section name in the drop-down menu.
To display a certain item:
• Locate the item in the Browse area using the left and right arrows and select the item.
See Tab Area Facilities and Toolbar Facilities.

2. Specifications
2.1 Administration Software Specifications
2.1.1 System Limits
� indicates included
υ indicates optional via license
System Limits
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 3
Features SecureNet SecureNet
SE
Specifications
SecureNet
Pro
Doors 20 100 1000
Keyholders 1000 10,000 75,000
Operators 10 10 50
Time/Mode Profiles (4000 periods across all profiles) 20 100 200
Holiday Profiles (20 periods each) 2 10 10
Access Groups (132 areas each) 20 2000 5000
Areas 1000 1000 1000
Organisational Unit 1 1 1
500 TCP/IP Channels υ 100 100
512 TCP/IP Channels unlimited unlimited unlimited
Direct Channels 2 2 10
Dialup Channels 2 2 10
Offline Channels unlimited unlimited unlimited
Controllers on a RS-485 channel on 500 channel 24
(500 licence
required)
24 24
Controllers on direct channel 32 32 32
If using GSM modems 12 12 12
Event Storage depends on
disc space
depends on
disc space
depends on
disc space
Alarm Workstations 1 1 2
Client PCs υ 2 5
System Limits Upgrades Maximum Limits
5000 Keyholders 75,000 75,000 75,000
50 Doors 1000 1000 1000
10 Doors 1000 1000 1000
500 Access Groups 5000 5000 5000
2 x 500 Channels 100 N/A N/A
50 Dialup Channels 250 250 250
10 Dialup Channels 250 250 250
2 Dialup Channels 250 250 250

10 x 1100/2100/2200 Controllers 250 250 250
10 Operators 100 100 100
1 Organisational Unit 25 25 25
1 Alarm Workstation 8 8 8
Client PCs 15 15 15
2.1.2 Administration Features
� indicates included
υ indicates optional via licence (SecureNet also requires a 500 TCP/IP channel licence, except
1100/2100/2200)
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 4
Features SecureNet SecureNet
SE
Specifications
SecureNet
Pro
Keyholder Pictures � � �
Start and End Dates for Keyholders � � �
Block Change of Keyholders � � �
Photo Identification � � �
Card Designer � � �
Area Administration � � �
Remote Lock Activation � � �
Door Mode Profiles � � �
Reader Mode Profiles � � �
Online Event Log � � �
Online Context Sensitive Help � � �
Backup and Restore � � �
Firmware Updates from PC � � �
Export to PDF, ODBC, Excel, etc � � �
Automatic Daylight Saving Changeover � � �
Alarm Management υ � �
Event Archiving and Restore υ � �
Audit Trail υ � �
CCTV υ � �
DVR υ υ �
Area Management (with mode profiles) υ υ �
Event to Action υ υ �
Muster and Evacuation υ υ �
Lift Control υ υ �
Remote Event to Action υ υ υ
Card Formats υ υ υ
1100/2100/2200 Support υ υ υ

2.2 Hardware Specifications
2.2.1 500 Specifications
System Limits
Maximum number of controllers on each RS-485 channel: 24
Maximum distance between the server and controller on
a network:
1500ft/500m alarm cable or
3000ft/1000m CAT5 cable
Number of RS-485 channels: 2
Number of RS-232 channels: 1
Maximum number of doors served:
128
Maximum number of keyholders served: 75,000
Maximum number of events in memory buffer: 10,000
Maximum number of access groups served: 5000
Maximum number of time profiles served: 200
Maximum number of system holidays served:
Power
20
Power supply: 10.5 to 14V dc (use an isolated PSU with backup battery)
Lithium battery: Non-replaceable:
(for real-time
clock)
Environment
Life expectancy 20 years @ 25°C/75°Fwhen unit not powered
Temperature: -10 to 55°C/14 to 130°F
Humidity: 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Facilities
One-Touch installation testing.
High speed network communications.
Built in TCP/IP & Ethernet support.
Plug-n-play network management.
Global anti-passback across all controllers connected to the 500 access and alarm server
Alarm integration.
Encrypted Communications.
PSTN connectivity via external modem.
Alarm dial-back.
Downloadable firmware into FLASH Memory.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 5
Specifications

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 6
Specifications
2.2.2 512 Specifications
System Limits
Maximum number of doors per controller: 2
Maximum number of /Key readers per controller: 4
Maximum number of Wiegand or Magstripe readers per
controller:
2
Maximum distance between the first controller and last
controller on a network:
1500ft/500m alarm cable or
3000ft/1000m CAT5 cable
Maximum distance between controllers:
1500ft/500m alarm cable or
3000ft/1000m CAT5 cable
Maximum distance between controller and reader: see below
Maximum number of keys: 10,000 see Note 1
Maximum number of events in memory buffer: 4000
Maximum number of access groups:
Notes
5000
1. The maximum number of keys is reduced if any keyholders have more than one access
group/personal access assigned.
2. Other system limits (e.g. number of controllers per system) depend on the
administration software being used.
Controller to Reader Distances
The following table gives the recommended maximum distance between a reader and controller
assuming 24AWG/0.22mm 2 unshielded cable is used and allows for 11V battery power.
Note
The figures below are for readers powered from the controller. The cable distances can
be doubled by locally powering the readers or using a 24V power supply.
Type of Reader
Maximum Recommended
Distance from Controller
Feet Metres
Low Profile, Panel Mount and Vandal Resistant 230 70
Standard Plus, Slimline and Standard Plus Vandal Resistant 825 250
Key Medium Range, Slimline and Vandal Resistant 825 250
DualTech Reader 230 70
PIN Reader 66 20
Wiegand and Magstripe Readers Depends on the type of
reader, see manufacturer's
documentation
Power
Power supply: 10.5 to 14V dc (it is recommended to use an isolated PSU with backup
battery)
Lithium battery: Type CR2450:
Environment
Life expectancy 3 years @ 25°C/75°F when unit not powered
Life expectancy 10 years @ 25°C/75°F when unit powered
Temperature: -10 to 55°C/14 to 130°F
Humidity: 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)

Facilities
One-Touch installation testing.
High speed network communications.
Plug-n-play network management.
Downloadable firmware into FLASH Memory.
2.2.3 520/530 I/O Controllers
System Limits
520 530
Maximum number of inputs: 20 2
Maximum number of low power outputs: 2 10
Maximum number of high power outputs: 0 2
Number of RS-485 channels:
Power
1 1
Power supply:
Environment
10.5 to 14V dc (it is recommended to use an isolated PSU with backup
battery)
Temperature: -10 to 55°C/14 to 130°F
Humidity: 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Facilities
One-Touch installation testing.
High speed network communications.
Downloadable firmware into FLASH Memory.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 7
Specifications

3. Hardware Installation
3.1 500 Series
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 8
Hardware Installation
500 series controllers can be administered by the Administration Software via a 500 TCP/IP
channel.
512 access controllers can also be connected on a direct channel or dialup channel. To connect
to a network, see the Controller IP Configuration section.
512 IP access controllers can be administered by the Administration Software but must be
connected on a Direct TCP/IP channel.
The hardware installation is described in the help files supplied with the software and in the
quick start guides supplied with the controllers.
3.2 1100/2100/2200 Series
If the license allows, 1100/2100/2200 series door controllers can be administered by the
administration software but must be connected on a direct channel or dialup channel. To
connect to a network, see the Controller IP Configuration section.
2200IP door controllers can be administered by the Administration Software but must be
connected on a Direct TCP/IP channel.
The hardware installation is described in the documentation supplied with the controllers.

4. Administration Software
4.1.1 Introduction to the Administration Software
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 9
Administration Software
The Administration Software is a PC-based administrative software package for access control
systems.
To obtain information on the following tasks:
• Select the appropriate icon. The tasks are listed in the recommended order for creating an
access control system but editing can be performed in any order, see the Simple Example
section.
Logon (from Windows desktop)
Customise company name, module names, categories, keyholder information, and
access options.
Customise the list view and alter its appearance.
Add/update/delete areas (only in Access by Areas mode, see Access Type section).
Start/stop the Administration Software engines (engines should be running).
Add/update/delete a channels
Add/update/delete a controllers.
Probe/configure/unconfigure controllers.
Add/update/delete a holiday profiles.
Add/update/delete a time profiles.
Add/update/delete a doors.
Add/update/delete an access group (only in Access by Access Group mode, see
Access Type section).
Add/update/delete a keyholders.
Add/update/delete an operators.
Configure video sources (a license is required for this facility).
Download database to the controllers.
Logoff.
4.1.2 Installation
The Administration Software is provided on CD. When the CD is placed in the CD drive of the
PC the following options are available.
The Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine (MSDE) must be installed on your PC before
Administration Software. If it is not, the opportunity to install it is displayed before the
Administration Software options are displayed.
1. Start the Administration Software installation program. If selected, the following
programs actions will be performed:
• DotNet Framework V1.1 installed
• Crystal Reports 11 installed
• Microsoft Message Queuing configured
• Microsoft Web Service Extensions installed
• SQL Express 2005 Database installed

• Administration Software checking for existing database
2. Install the Administration Software Client only.
3. View the release notes.
4. Display help files.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 10
Administration Software
Make a note of any existing license keys. If the Administration Software is upgraded and
re-installed, the license keys must be re-entered.
Notes
1. Installation can only be performed by an Operating System Administrator and should be
performed by the local administrator.
2. The options can also be displayed by running Setup.exe provided on the CD.
3. Before installing, ensure that File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks is enabled.
4. The software is installed with access controlled by areas and access groups.
5. The software is installed in demonstration mode which allows the database to be
specified but the controllers cannot be configured until a valid license key has been
specified.
6. If upgrading administration software, new license keys will be required.
To ensure File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks is enabled:
1. Select Start > Settings > Control Panel and the Control Panel window is displayed.
2. Select Network Connections and the Network Connections window is displayed.
3. Right click on the connection and select Properties.
4. Ensure that the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks checkbox is selected.
5. Select OK.
6. It may be necessary to start the 'Server' service.
To start the 'Server' service:
1. Select Start > Run and the Run window is displayed.
2. Enter cmd and select OK.
3. Enter net start and a list of services that have started is displayed.
4. If 'Server' has not started, enter net start server.
4.1.3 Updates
The existing software can be updated by upgrading the license agreement (see the Upgrade
License section) or updating the software (see the Installation section).
There is an option when updating the software to retain the existing database. Alternatively, a
database that has been saved using the Database Backup facility can be restored (see the
Restore Database section) or a for Windows or Vision database can be imported (see the
Import section).

4.2 Access Control Overview
4.2.1 System Design
4.2.1.1 Access Types
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 11
Administration Software
The administration software may provide the following access types options:
Areas and access groups Each keyholder is assigned to access groups that allow access to certain
areas. For example, used in systems where there is more than one door
into most areas and a large number of areas that require grouping
according to who has access.
Areas and security levels Each keyholder and area are assigned a security level which determines
which areas each keyholder can access. For example, used in systems
where there is more than one door into most areas and a small number
of areas.
Doors and access groups Keyholders are assigned to access groups that allow access to certain
doors. For example, used in systems where there is only one door into
each area and a large number of areas that require grouping according
to who has access.
Doors and security levels Each keyholder and door are assigned a security level which determines
which doors each keyholder can open. For example, used in systems
where there is only one door into each area and a small number of
areas.
The access type required is specified at installation but can be changed using customisation.
It is recommended to take a backup of the system before changing access type because
information could be lost (e.g. access groups and areas).
4.2.1.2 System Design
When designing an access control system, it is necessary to plan the requirements of the
system. This includes deciding how many areas, doors, keyholders, etc. are needed with
consideration given to possible modification and expansion.
To help you plan your access control system, an example and glossary is given below and
advice given in the following sections. You should aim to have a similar map of your site before
you specify, install or commission your system. A simple example to get you started is given in
the Simple Example section.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 12
Administration Software
Access Controller
An access controller determines when a door is unlocked depending on the key code received
from a reader or Request to Exit switch. The type of door controller determines how many
doors it can control (e.g. the 512 can control 2 doors using up to 4 readers). The example
requires seven 512 controllers.
Area
An area has at least one door. The example has 9 areas (the outside is counted as an area).
Door
A door allows or prevents access in and out of an area. The example has 13 doors. Several
doors have a reader on each side to allow access to be controlled in both in and out directions.
Other doors have a Request to Exit switch that allows anyone to leave the area.
Door Channel
A door channel is the connection between a door and a controller. The 512 has two door
channels because it can control two doors. Each door channel can have two readers (in and
out) or one reader and a Request to Exit switch connected to it. The door channels are
specified as described in the Door Configuration section.
Key
A key is a token, fob or card that when presented to a reader will unlock the door. The key must
be valid (i.e. known to the system, allow access to the area and not presented outside a
permitted time profile).
Keyholder
A keyholder is a person who has a key. This could be a member of staff or a visitor. The key
allocated to the keyholder will only be valid for specified areas and times (e.g. visitors can be
prevented from entering the Development area at any time and all areas after a certain date).
Reader
A reader sends a key code to a controller when a key is presented to it. If the key is valid, an
unlock door signal is sent to the door lock.
Request to Exit Switch
A Request to Exit switch is a switch (or button) that unlocks a door when pressed. A valid key
is not required so anyone can leave an area.
Time Profile
A time profile can be applied to a door, keyholder or access group to only allow access during
certain times (e.g. only during office hours).
4.2.1.3 System Plan
The example given in the System Design section requires the following information to plan the
access control system. The example uses seven 512 access controllers (see Hardware
Configuration using 500 Channel section and Hardware Configuration using Offline
Channel section). Each access controller can control two doors.
Doors
Door Controller Door Channel Reader/RTE
Outside/Reception 1 1 In reader
Out reader
Reception/Accounts 1 2 In reader
Request to Exit
Reception/Technical Support 2 1 In reader
Request to Exit
Reception/Development 2 2 In reader
Request to Exit
Reception/Corridor 3 1 In reader
Request to Exit

Reception/Sales 3 2 In reader
Request to Exit
Accounts/Technical Support 4 1 In reader
Out reader
Technical
Support/Development
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 13
4 2 In reader
Out reader
Development/Stores 5 1 In reader
Out reader
Stores/Corridor 5 2 In reader
Request to Exit
Canteen/Corridor 6 1 In reader
Request to Exit
Corridor/Outside 6 2 In reader
Out reader
Corridor/Sales 7 1 In reader
Request to Exit
Spare 7 2 Not used
Administration Software
The example uses the following access information:
Holiday Profiles
Shutdown Periods
Time Profiles
No Access, Access at all times, Long Day, Office hours, Evening, and Night Shift.
Access Groups
Accountants, Canteen Staff, Cleaners, Development Team, Sales Team, Security, Stores, and
Technical Support.
4.2.1.4 Hardware Configuration using 500 Channel
The example shows how the controllers described in the System Plan section can be
connected:

4.2.1.5 Hardware Configuration using Offline Channel
The example shows how the controllers described in the System Plan section can be
connected if using an offline channel.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 14
Administration Software

4.2.2 Simple Example
4.2.2.1 Introduction
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 15
Administration Software
This example demonstrates how a simple access control system can be configured and
administrated using Administration Software. It is recommended that the context-sensitive help
(accessed by pressing F1) is used throughout the example to discover more information (e.g.
how to customise the views and the use of right click).
Note
Although this is a simple example, access is defined by areas and access groups (see
the Access Types section) to demonstrate how a more complex system would be
defined. It can be used as a starting point and then modified for an actual system.
Perform the following tasks in the following order:
Define the areas
Add the 500 TCP/IP channel
Add/probe the controller
Define the holiday profiles
Define the time profiles
Update the doors
Define access groups
Add Keyholders
Add Operators
The system can then be edited in any order to configure your own system.
4.2.2.2 Define the Areas
This example has 3 areas (outside, reception and sales). Outside is automatically created.
1. Select Area in Explorer bar.
2. Select New in Property Page.
3. Enter the Name (i.e. Reception).
4. Enter the Description (i.e. Access to/from Outside and Sales).
Note
Door access to areas is automatically entered when the doors have been defined.
5. Select Add on the Property Page.
Repeat for the sales area.
Now define the 500 TCP/IP channel.

4.2.3 Add the 500 TCP/IP channel
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 16
Administration Software
For this example, only one 500 server is required.
For this example, only one 500 server is required. The 500 is connected to the TCP/IP channel.
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New and Create New 500 on the Property Page.
3. Enter the Name (e.g. 500 TCP/IP channel).
4. Select Protocol Type (e.g. TCP/IP via permanent connection).
5. Select the computer name (e.g. PCNAME).
6. Enter the 500 URL (e.g. http://192.168.31.14) or select the 500 Probe button.
7. Select the Areas tab and select all the areas.
8. Select Add on the Property Page.
9. Wait for the communications to be established.
Now add and probe the controller.
4.2.3.1 Add and Probe the Controller
For this example, only one 512 is required. The reception door has an in and out reader and the
sales door has an in reader and a Request to Exit switch.
To add the 512 controller:
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New and Create New Controller on the Property Page.
3. Enter the Name (i.e. Controller 1).
4. Enter the Description (i.e. Reception and Sales).
5. Select Type (i.e. 512).
6. Select 500 (i.e. 500 TCP/IP channel).
7. Select Add on the Property Page.
To probe the 512 controller:
1. Select Hardware > Probe Channels or the icon. The physical connections are probed
and 512 controllers are connected, the serial number of 512 is displayed.
2. Drag the controller from the list on the right on to the serial number on the left.
3. Select the option to download to the controller and OK.
Now define the holiday profiles.
4.2.3.2 Define the Holiday Profiles
1. Select Holiday in the Explore bar.
2. Select New on the Property Page.
3. Enter the Name (i.e. Shutdown Periods).
4. Enter the Description (i.e. Bank Holidays and Works Shutdown).
5. Add a holiday:
• Select Add Holiday on the Property Page.
• Enter the name of the holiday (e.g. Christmas).
• Select the start date and time from the drop-down calendar.
• Select the end date and time from the drop-down calendar.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 17
Administration Software
6. Repeat Step 5 for each shutdown period.
7. Select Add on the Property Page.
Repeat if another holiday profile is required.
Now define the time profiles.
4.2.3.3 Define the Time/Mode Profiles
Note
If 1100/2100/2200 controllers are being used, the time profiles must be defined after the
controllers and the time profile property page is different from the time profile property page
displayed for 512 only systems. 1100/2100/2200 controllers use daily time profiles and 512
controllers use weekly time profiles but if any 1100/2100/2200 controllers are used, both
types of controller use daily time profiles.
To add time/mode profiles:
1. Select Time & Mode Profile in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New and Create New Time Profile, Create New Door Profile or Create New
Reader Profile on the Property Page.
3. Enter the Name (i.e. Office Hours).
4. Enter the Description (i.e. 09:00 to 17:00 Weekdays).
5. If specifying a mode profile, select the Mode.
6. Specify the active period for each day:
• Click on a day to create a new time period and drag the created time bar.
• The period start and end can be fine tuned by using the From and To increment boxes
(e.g. Monday 09:00 to Monday 17:00).
• The time period can be copied to another day by pressing and holding the Ctrl key,
selecting a time period and dragging it to another day while continuing to hold the Ctrl
key.
• The time period can also be copied by right clicking on a time period, selecting Copy,
right clicking on another day and selecting Paste.
• Repeat for each day.
7. Specify the active periods for a holiday:
• Select the Holiday tab.
• Select the holiday profile (e.g. Bank Holidays)
• Click on the holiday bar to create a new time period and drag the created time bar.
• Fine-tune the time using the From and To increment boxes (e.g. 09:00 to 17:00).
To add daily time profiles:
1. Select Time Profile in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New on the Property Page.
3. Enter the Name (i.e. Office Hours).
4. Enter the Description (i.e. 09:00 to 17:00 Weekdays).
5. Specify the active times for each day:
• Select the Period 1 check box.
• Specify the Start Time.
• Specify the End Time.
• Select the day check boxes for each day the time period applies to.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 18
Administration Software
• Repeat for other time periods (e.g. weekends may be different to week days).
6. Specify whether the time period applies during a holiday period (if the No Holiday Period
radio button is selected, the time profile applies during holidays).
7. Select Add on the Property Page.
Repeat if other time profiles are required.
Now update the doors.
4.2.3.4 Update the Doors
This example has 2 doors: the reception door has an in and out reader and the sales door has
an in reader and a Request to Exit switch.
Reception door:
1. Select Doors in the Explorer bar.
2. Select the reception door (e.g. Controller 1 Door 1).
3. Edit the Name (i.e. Reception door).
4. Enter the Description (i.e. Outside/Reception).
5. Select the Configuration tab and ensure the settings are correct.
6. Select the Access tab.
7. Select Reader Type.
8. Define SIG A for reception door:
• Select the area to access from drop-down menu (i.e. Outside).
• Select Reader connected radio button.
9. Define SIG B for reception door:
• Select the area to access from drop-down menu (i.e. Reception).
• Select Reader connected radio button.
10. Select area to access from drop-down menu (i.e. Reception).
11. Select Update on the Property Page.
Sales door:
1. Select the sales door (e.g. Controller 1 Door 2).
1. Edit the Name (i.e. Sales door).
2. Enter the Description (i.e. Sales/Reception).
3. Select the Configuration tab and ensure the settings are correct (e.g. reader).
4. Select the Access tab.
5. Define SIG A for reception door:
• Select the area to access from drop-down menu (i.e. Sales).
• Select Reader connected radio button.
6. Define SIG B for reception door:
• Select the No reader connected radio button (Request to Exit switch is used to exit
Sales).
7. Select Update on the Property Page.
Now define the access groups.

4.2.3.5 Define Access Groups
1. Select Access Group in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New on the Property Page.
3. Enter the Name (i.e. Sales Team).
4. Enter the Description (i.e. Sales Personnel).
5. Select the Access Groups tab.
6. Select Profile 1 check box.
7. Select a time profile from the drop-down menu (i.e. Office Hours).
8. Select the check boxes next to each area that can be accessed by this group.
9. Select Add on the Property Page.
Repeat if other access groups are required.
Now add keyholders.
4.2.3.6 Add Keyholders
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 19
Administration Software
1. Select Keyholder in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New on the Property Page.
3. Enter the details and photo.
4. Select Details tab and fill in the details. In most cases, the End Date check box should not
be selected, because the end date is not known.
5. Select the Notes tab and enter appropriate text (e.g. any disability that might require longer
door open time).
6. Select the Keys tab and present a key to the administration reader.
7. If required, select the Set PIN button and specify a PIN to be used with OneProx PIN
Readers.
8. Select the Extra Information tab and enter the details (only available if extra fields have
been specified, see Customisation section).
9. Select the Personal Access tab and define areas the keyholder can access:
• Select the Profile 1 check box.
• Select the time profile from the drop-down list. Selecting 'No Time Profile' will allow
access to the selected areas at all times.
• Specify the areas the time profile applies to by selecting/deselecting the area check
boxes.
• If required, repeat for Profile 2.
10. Select the Access Groups tab and select the access group(s) that keyholder belongs to.
11. Select Add on the Property Page.
12. Select the Events tab, present the key to the readers and check that the events are
reported and access is allowed/disallowed depending on keys access rights.
Repeat for other keyholders.
Now add operators.
4.2.3.7 Add Operators
1. Select Operator in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New on the Property Page.
3. Enter the Login Name (e.g. Supervisor).

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 20
Administration Software
4. Select Set Password and specify a password for the operator.
5. Select the keyholder who is to have operator privileges. A new keyholder can be specified
by selecting Create New.
6. Specify other fields as required.
7. Select the Privileges tab and select the operator template that determines which facilities
the keyholder can access (see Operator Privileges section).
8. Select Add on the Property Page.
Repeat for any other operators.
Now download database to the controller.
4.2.3.8 Download Database to the Controller
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.
2. Select a controller.
3. Select the Tasks button.
4. Select Download controller database.
5. Select OK to confirm.
The simple example is now configured and can be used as a basis for an actual system.

4.3 Administration Software Tools
4.3.1 Configure Device IP Addresses
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 21
Administration Software
A static IP address (allocated by the Network Administrator) must be used for the 500, 512IP
and 2200IP.
To configure a static IP address:
1. Select Start > Programs> PAC
SecureNet Tools > Configure Device IP
Addresses (via the Windows Start
Menu) and the IP Device Address
Configuration Utility window is
displayed.
2. Select a 500, 512IP, or 2200IP tab.
3. Select a device.
4. Select Entry > Modify and the set IP
Parameters window is displayed.
Note
If the 500 selected is locked, it must
be unlocked by powering it up with the
One-Touch button pressed.
5. Obtain the IP address automatically or
enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask and
Default Gateway.
6. Select OK.
MAC Address 1 The MAC address of the device (the unique identifier for the TCP/IP
port).
1 512IP and 2200IP only
Serial Number 2 The serial number of the device.
2 500 and 512IP only
Auto IP An indication of whether the IP address has been automatically
allocated (True) or not (False).
Locked 3 An indication of whether the IP address has been locked and cannot
be reset (True) or not (False).
3 500 only
IP Address The IP address of the device.
Subnet Mask The subnet mask of the network.
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway.
Device Type 4 The device type.
To refresh the window:
• Select File > Refresh
To exit the window:
• Select File > Exit or .
4 2200IP only

4.3.2 Help
To display the administration software help file:
• Select Start > Programs > PAC SecureNet Tools > Help
For context-sensitive help:
• Select an area on an administration software window and press F1 on the keyboard.
4.3.3 Release Notes
To display the release notes for the administration software:
• Select Start > Programs > PAC SecureNet Tools > Release Notes
4.3.4 Restore Database
Note
Restore can only be performed by an Operating System Administrator.
To restore a database:
1. Ensure that all users are logged off.
2. Select Start > Programs > PAC
SecureNet Tools > Restore Database
and the Restore window is displayed.
3. Select a file using the browse facility.
4. Select the Restore button.
4.3.5 Service Manager
Note
Starting and stopping an engine can only be performed by an Operating System
Administrator.
To start/stop an Engine:
1. Select Start > Programs> PAC
SecureNet Tools > Service Manager or
double click the icon in the Windows
taskbar or Select which engines are to be
started/stopped.
2. Select which engines are to be
started/stopped.
3. Select the Start or Stop button.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 22
Administration Software
Client Engine
A client engine can be installed on a client PC to allow administration and monitoring from the
client PC. The client engine can be installed when installing the Administration Software on the
client PC or by selecting Tools > Configure Client Engine on the client PC.
The client engine can be unconfigured if no channels are defined by selecting Tools >
Unconfigure Client Engine on the client PC.

4.3.6 Upgrade Database
Note
Restore can only be performed by an Operating System Administrator.
To upgrade a database:
1. Ensure that all users are logged off.
2. Select Start > Programs > PAC
SecureNet Tools > Upgrade Database
and the Upgrade window is displayed.
3. Select a file using the browse facility.
4. Select the Upgrade button.
4.3.7 Application Software
To logon to the administration software:
• Select Start > Programs > PAC SecureNet.
or
• Select the icon.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 23
Administration Software

4.4 Administration Software Overview
4.4.1 Login
To login to the Access Control Administration Software:
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 24
Administration Software
1. Double click the Administration Software icon on the Windows desktop and the Log
on/Exit window is displayed.
2. Select or enter an operator name and password. The operator privileges determine the
facilities that can be accessed (see Operator Privileges section).
3. If the system has multiple organisational units, select the Organisation.
4. If a key can be used (or is required) to log on, select the Key login checkbox and present a
valid key to the administration reader.
5. The Options button can be used by users with Operating System Administrator privileges
to specify the server the client PC is connected to. The server should be inside the
organisation firewall.
When using 10BaseT cabling, a hub must be used to network PCs together. Do not
simply plug a CAT5 crossover cable between two PC network cards as this will prove
unreliable.
5. Select Log on and the Administration Software window is displayed.
Note
When logging on for the first time after installation, the Login Name must be Installer.
Then select Log on and a password can be specified.
The following will be hidden in the help file and only accessed by Help on the error
message.
Only one instance of the Administration Software can be running at any one time so if an
activation of the Administration Software is attempted while another is already running an error
message is displayed.
The Windows Task Manager can be used to end the task or the current task can be logged
out before attempting a re-activation.
To use the Windows Task Manager:
1. Press Crtl+Shift+Esc.
2. Select the Administration Software program and End Task (to close the program) or
Switch to (to locate the program).
If a system alarm (or selected alarms not assigned to an area) are detected at login, a System
Alarms window is displayed.

4.4.2 Administration Software Window
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 25
Administration Software
After login, the Administration Software Window has a Welcome Screen, Menus, Toolbar,
Explorer Bar, and Status Bar.
The Welcome screen is replaced by the List View and Property Page when a module is
selected in the Explorer bar. The Welcome screen can be redisplayed by selecting the
organisational unit and System Summary tab. The organisational unit name can be edited
using the Customisation facilities and appears above the Explorer bar.
The window can be maximised, minimised and resized and the List View, Explore Bar and
Property Page can be resized by dragging the edges.

4.4.3 Welcome Screen / System Summary
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 26
Administration Software
The Welcome screen is displayed after the first login and when the System Summary tab is
selected. The Welcome screen displays information on the selected organisational unit (e.g.
number of keyholders and maximum limits of the system). If the operator privileges allow, it also
has a Set Organisation Options link that allows the modules to be customised (see the
Customisation section).
To display the welcome screen/system summary:
1. If necessary, select the organisational
unit.
2. Select the System Summary tab.
To display the list view and property page:
1. If necessary, select the organisational
unit.
2. Select a module in the Explorer bar.
Only the modules allowed by the user’s
privileges for the selected organisational unit
will be displayed.
A module can be redisplayed by selecting the
appropriate tab or closed by selecting .
Further information on screen areas is given in the Administration Software Window section.

4.4.4 Menus
Normal Menu:
Keyholder Menu
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 27
Administration Software
Hardware Menu:
The menu items that can be accessed depend on the operator privileges. The list below details
all options available to an Installer.
File
Logoff Displays the Log on/Exit window.
Import Displays the File Import window.
Activate Alarm Enables/Disables the Alarm Alert popups.
Alerts
Preview ID Card Displays a previously-created photo ID card for the selected
keyholder(s) which can then be printed (Keyholder List View
only).
Print ID Card Prints a previously-created photo ID card for the selected
keyholder (Keyholder List View only).
Exit Exits immediately.
Edit
Update or Add Saves a new record or updates an existing record.
Current Record
Create a New Creates a new record.
Record
Delete Current Deletes the selected record.
Record
Make Copy Record Copies the selected record. To paste the record, select Update
or Add Record.
Discard Changes to Discards any changes since the last Update or Add operation.
Current Record
These facilities are the same as those offered by the buttons on the Property Page.
View
Explorer Bar Toggles the display of the Explorer bar.
Toolbar Displays toolbar submenu:
Standard Buttons Toggles the display of the toolbar.
Show Text Toggles the display of icon names.
Large Icons Toggles the display of large icons.
Windows Displays Windows submenu:
Restore Panes – displays all tabs and restores undocked
windows back to their default position.
Show all tear offs – enables tips to be displayed when
attempting to use the tear off facility.
Don’t show tear off tips – disables the tear off tips.
Enable/Disable Tearoff – toggles the tear off facility. If disabled,
any undocked windows can be moved but not docked.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 28
Administration Software
Tech Support Mode – toggles between default windows settings
and customised windows settings.
A list of windows that can be brought to the front when selected.
Large Icons Displays the list with associated large icons (List View only).
Small Icons Displays the list with associated small icons (List View only).
Details Displays the list with extra information in columns (List View
only).
Thumbnails Displays the list with associated photos (Keyholder List View
only).
Tree View Displays the list with parent and subordinate areas (Area List
View only).
Choose Columns Specifies the columns to be displayed in the list view.
Back Selects the previously selected module.
Forward Selects the next module if Back has been used.
Keyholder Detail
Report
Displays the keyholder detail report for the selected keyholder
(Keyholder List View only).
Event Report Displays the keyholder event search parameters for selecting an
event report for the selected keyholder (Keyholder List View
only).
Show Details Displays information on the selected record in a separate window,
e.g. time profile in access groups.
Navigate to Displays information on the selected record in a the
Administration Software window, e.g. time profile in access
groups.
Refresh Updates the current display.
Keyholders (only on Keyholder module)
Anti-Passback Forgives an anti-passback violation by the selected keyholder.
Forgive
Encode Keycode Displays the Encode Keycode window (see the Encode
Keycode section).
Search Bar Displays the Search bar (see the Search for a Keyholder
section).
Hardware (only on Hardware module)
Options when a 500 TCP/IP channel is selected:
Reset Password Displays a warning message to consult the hardware
documentation (see the Manage Controller Firmware section).
Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physically
connected controllers.
Download direct
channels
Download offline
channels
Download Channel
Database
Synchronise all
channel clocks
Downloads the database to all controllers on selected
direct/dialup channels.
Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline
channels (see the Download Database to the Controllers
using the PDA section).
Downloads the database of all controllers on the selected 500
channel.
Synchronises all clocks on the system with the clock on the PC.

Firmware
Download
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 29
Administration Software
Displays the Manage Firmware window (see the Manage
Controller Firmware section).
Only download firmware to one server or controller
at a time.
Modems Displays the Modems window (see the Modems section).
Options when a direct channel is selected:
Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physically
connected controllers.
Download direct
channels
Download offline
channels
Downloads the database to all controllers on selected
direct/dialup channels.
Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline
channels (see the Download Database to the Controllers
using the PDA section).
Initialise CNC 1 Initialises the CNC if the selected channel is a 1100/2100/2200 -
RS232 - SWB - CNC channel.
Abort Channel
Download 2
Download Channel
Database
Synchronise all
channel clocks
1 1100/2100/2200 - RS232 - SWB - CNC channel only
Aborts a channel download.
2 1100/2100/2200 channel only
Downloads the database to all controllers on the selected
channel.
Synchronises all clocks on the system with the clock on the PC.
Modems Displays the Modems window (see the Modems section).
Options when a dialup channel is selected:
Dial Now Displays the Dialup Connection window to dialup a modem
(see the Modems section).
Show Call Progress Display the Dialup Connection window to show the dialup
progress (see the Modems section).
Hang Up Display the Dialup Connection window to hang up a dialup
connection (see the Modems section).
Reset Password 1 Displays a warning message to consult the hardware
documentation (see the Modems section).
1
512 only
Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physically
connected controllers.
Download direct
channels
Download offline
channels
Abort Channel
Download 2
Download Channel
Database
Synchronise all
controller clocks
Downloads the database to all controllers on selected
direct/dialup channels.
Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline
channels (see the Download Database to the Controllers
using the PDA section).
Aborts a channel download.
2 1100/2100/2200 channel only
Downloads the database to all controllers on the selected
channel.
Synchronises all clocks on the channel to the clock on the PC.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 30
Administration Software
Modems Displays the Modems window (see the Modems section).
Options when an offline channel is selected:
Reset Password Displays a warning message to consult the hardware
documentation (see the Reset Password section).
Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physically
connected controllers.
Download direct Downloads the database to all controllers on selected
channels
direct/dialup channels.
Download offline Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline
channels
channels (see the Download Database to the Controllers
using the PDA section).
Options when an online controller is selected:
Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physically
connected controllers.
Download direct Downloads the database to all controllers on selected
channels
direct/dialup channels.
Download offline Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline
channels
channels (see the Download Database to the Controllers
using the PDA section).
Configure
controller 1
Displays the Configure Controller window (see the
Probe/Configure/Unconfigure a Controller section).
Unconfigure
controller 2
1 Unconfigured controller only
Unconfigures the selected controller from its channel.
2 Configured controller only
Download
Downloads the database to the selected controller.
controller database
Reset Diagnostic Resets the diagnostic code.
Code
Firmware download Displays the Manage Firmware window (see the Manage
Controller Firmware section).
Only download firmware to one server or controller at a
time.
Modems Displays the Modems window (see the Modems section).
Options when an offline controller is selected:
Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physically
connected controllers.
Download direct
channels
Download offline
channels
Connect to
Controller
Disconnect from
controller
Downloads the database to all controllers on selected
direct/dialup channels.
Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline
channels (see the Download Database to the Controllers
using the PDA section).
Connects the controller.
Disconnects the controller.
Identify Controller Displays the Identify/Configure Controller window (see the
Download Database to the Controllers using the PC section).

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 31
Administration Software
Tools
Event Log Displays the Event Log window (see the Event Log section).
System Alarms Displays the System Alarms window (see the System Alarms
section).
Alarm Viewer Displays the Alarm Viewer window (see the Alarm Viewer
section).
Card Designer Displays the ID Card Designer window (see the ID Card
Designer section).
Audit Trail Displays the Audit Trail window (see the Audit Trail section).
Alarm Map
Displays the Alarm Map Designer window (see the Alarm Map
Designer
Designer section).
Event to Action Displays the Event to Action Configuration window (see the
Configuration Event to Action section)
Configure
Displays the Configure Organisations window (see the
Organisations Configure Organisations section).
Manage OEM
Interface 3
Displays the OEM Interface Configuration window. Further
information is given in documentation supplied with the OEM
product.
3
only if license allows.
Database Backup Displays the Backup window (see the Backups section).
Event Archiving Displays the Event Archiving window (see the Event Archive
section)
Advanced
Displays the Advanced Keyholder Window (Keyholder List
Keyholder Search View only, see the Search for a Keyholder section).
Key Seek Displays the Find Keyholder by Key window (see the Search
for a Keyholder section).
Upgrade License Displays the License Keys window (see Upgrade License
section).
Configure
Displays the Configure Peripherals window (see Configure
Peripherals
Peripherals section).
Manage Controller Displays the Manage Firmware window (see the Manage
Firmware
Controller Firmware section).
Change Password Changes the current user's password (see the Change
Password section).
Options Displays the Organisation Options window (see the
Customisation section).
Reports
Favourites A Manage Favourites option that displays the Favourite
Reports Manager window (see the Add a Report to
Favourites section) and a list of favourite reports that are
displayed when selected.
Custom Report Displays the Custom Report Manager window (see the Add a
Manager
Custom Report section.
Custom Reports A list of custom reports that are displayed when selected.
Saved Reports A list of saved reports that are displayed when selected.
Refresh reports Updates the list of reports in the Explorer bar and Reports
explorer and menu menu.

Help
4.4.5 Toolbar
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 32
Administration Software
Contents Displays this Help file.
About ... Displays information about the version and build of the
Administration Software currently running. The Installer tab
displays information entered at software installation and the
System Info button access standard Windows facilities.
To alter the appearance of the icons:
• Right click on the toolbar and the following facilities are then available:
• Toggle the button name by selecting Show Text.
• Toggle the button size by selecting Large Icons (this also affects the Navigator tab
in the Explorer bar).
To display the full name of the icon:
• Move the cursor over the button but do not select it.
The icons provide following facilities:
Go Back selects the previously selected module. Selecting the down arrow on the
left of the icon, gives a list of modules for reselection.
Go Forward selects the next module if the Go Back icon has been used. Selecting
the down arrow on the left of the icon, gives a list of modules for reselection.
View/Hide Explorer Bar toggles the Explorer bar display.
Update or Add a Current Record confirms any changes made to the current
record.
Create a New Record creates a new record.
Delete Current Record deletes the selected record.
Discard Changes to Current Record discards any changes since the last Update
or Add operation.
Displays the Find Keyholder by Key window (see the Search for a Keyholder
section).
Displays the Search bar in Keyholder module.
Search Criteria to Refine List View displays the Search bar (Keyholder module
only, see the Search for a Keyholder section).
List View Modes selects how the List View displays its contents. Selecting the
down arrow gives the following options:
Large Icons Displays the list with associated large icons.
Small Icons Displays the list with associated small icons.
List Displays the list only.
Details Displays the list with extra information in columns.
Thumbnails Displays the list with associated photos (Keyholder module only).
Tree View Displays a tree view of the areas (Area module only).
View Event Log displays the Event Log window.

4.4.6 Explorer Bar
Alarms displays the Alarm Viewer window.
Database Backup displays the Backup window.
Anti Passback Forgive forgives an anti-passback violation by the selected
keyholder (Keyholder module only).
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 33
Administration Software
Probe Controller Connections collects information from physical connections
(Hardware module only).
Bring up Modem Configuration Dialog displays the Modems window (Hardware
module only.
Refresh updates the current display.
The Explorer bar has three tabs:
The Navigator tab displays a modules list. Selecting a module, displays
appropriate information in the List View and Property Page.
The Shortcuts tab displays a tools list. Selecting a tool (Event Log, Database
Backup, Alarm Viewer, Alarm Map Designer, Event to Action Configuration,
ID Card Designer, Event Archiving or Audit Trail) activates the appropriate tool.
The Reports tab displays a report folders list . Selecting a report folder, displays a
list of reports in that folder. Selecting a report displays the report and provides
Print facilities.

4.4.7 Status Bar
The Status bar displays the following:
• Messages.
• The currently logged on operator.
• A count of the number of records in the module.
• The maximum number of records allowed in the module (if appropriate).
4.4.8 List View
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 34
Administration Software
The List View displays all of the records that are associated with the module selected in the
Explorer bar. Selecting a record in the List View will cause the properties associated with that
record to be displayed in the Property Page.
The List View can be resized by dragging any of the edges.
To customise the list view using the Custom Settings window:
1. Select View > Choose Columns (via the
Menus) and the Custom Settings
window is displayed.
2. Select the check box next to the columns
to be displayed.
3. Enter the column widths.
4. Select from a drop-down list the column to
be used to sort the list.
5. Select the Ascending or Descending
radio button to specify how the list will be
sorted.
6. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to cancel.
To customise the list view from the list view:
• To select which columns to display, right click on the column heading and select which
columns to display from the drop-down menu.
• To alter the column widths, drag the border in the column heading.
• To toggle the list view order, select the column heading and the triangle will toggle for
ascending or descending order.
To alter the list view:
1. Right click a record, or select the View menu, or the arrow next to the icon.
2. Select a view from the drop-down menu:
Large Icons Displays the list with associated large icons.
Small Icons Displays the list with associated small icons.
Details Displays the list with extra information in columns.
Thumbnails 1 Displays the list with associated photos (Keyholder module only).
Tree View Displays a tree view of the areas (Area module only).
To create a record:
1. Right click on a record and select New from the drop-down menu, or Edit > Create a New
Record, or the icon.
2. Edit the new record.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 35
Administration Software
3. Select the Update or Add button, or Edit > Update or Add Current Record, or the
icon.
To copy a record:
1. Right click on a record and select Copy from the drop-down menu, or select a record and
Edit > Make a Copy of Current Record.
2. Edit the new record.
3. Select the Update or Add button, or Edit > Update or Add Current Record, or the
icon.
To delete a record:
• Right click on a record and select Delete from the drop-down menu, or select a record and
the Delete button, or Edit > Delete Current Record, or the icon.
To display a report:
• Right click on a record and select Report from the drop-down menu, or select a record and
View > Report List Selection.
To find a record:
1. Select a column.
2. Enter the first character(s) of the record (e.g. Entering S in the Name column will find the
first record with a name starting with S).
To refresh the display:
• Right click on a record and select Refresh from the drop-down menu, or select a record
and View > Refresh, or the icon, or the F5 key.
4.4.9 Property Page
The Property Page displays information associated with the record selected in the List View.
Each module displays different information. The information is displayed on tabbed areas and
some modules have more than one tab to accommodate all the relevant information.
The Property Page can be resized by dragging any of the edges. When there is insufficient
room to display the fields required, scroll bars are displayed to allow access to these fields.
Each Property Page has four buttons:
Update/Add Update is displayed if data is edited. When selected, any changes are saved.
Add is displayed if a new record is being added. When selected, the new record
is saved.
New Allows a new record to be created.
Delete Allows the selected record to be deleted.
Cancel Discards any changes made to the current record providing Update or Add
have not been selected.
Note
The buttons affect the whole Property Page not just the currently displayed tab.

4.4.10 Logoff
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 36
Administration Software
To logoff from the Administration Software:
1. Select File > Logoff or press Ctrl-Q and the Log on/Exit window is displayed.
2. You can log on again (see the Logon section) or exit the window by selecting Exit.
Note
The system will logoff automatically after 10 minutes if not used. This auto-logout time
can be modified for each operator (see the Operator Details section).

4.5 Organisation Options
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 37
Administration Software
4.5.1 Customisation
Note
The options available for customisation depend on the license(s). To apply license(s),
see the Upgrade License section.
To customise the system and organisational unit:
1. Display the Organisation Options window by selecting Set Organisation Options on the
Welcome Screen or Tools > Options on the Menus.
2. To customise the system settings, select System Settings.
3. To customise the system card formats, select Card Format.
4. To customise the system event archiving options, select Event Archiving.
5. To customise the alarm response messages, select Alarm Responses.
6. To customise the system access options, select System Access.
7. To customise the organisational unit details, select Organisational Unit Details.
8. To customise the organisational unit access options, select Access.
9. To customise the organisational unit module names, select Custom Labels.
10. To customise the organisational unit categories, select Categories.
11. To customise the organisational unit keyholder extra information, select Keyholder Extra
Details.
12. To customise the organisational unit alarms, select Alarms.
13. Select Apply (window remains open) or OK (closes window).
Note
OK and Apply save the changes on all the tabs.
4.5.2 System Settings
To customise the system settings:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation
Options window as described in the
Customisation section.
2. Select System Settings.
3. The following facilities are then available:
• Specify a Reminder Interval for
database backups.
• Specify PIN Length.
• Select/deselect User Definable PIN.
• Select/deselect Allow PIN Change at
Door. To change the PIN at the door,
click here.
• Specify a Communication
Protection Password for
1100/2100/2200 Series Door
Controller dialup channels. The
password is an 8-digit key code that
can be entered manually or via the
administration desktop reader.
4. Select another option or close the window.

To enter an area controlled by a legacy Stanley PIN reader
Present a valid key and enter its PIN code.
To enter an area controlled by a OneProx reader
Present a valid key and enter its PIN code followed by #.
To change the PIN at the door:
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 38
Administration Software
This does not apply to the legacy Stanley PIN Reader. The legacy Stanley PIN Reader is
the only reader that can be used with 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers.
1. Create a reader mode profile for PIN only or PIN and Token access.
2. Select the Door Access tab and apply the reader mode profile to the PIN reader.
3. If PIN and Token mode, present a valid key to the PIN reader.
4. Press * and enter the current PIN followed by #.
5. Enter the new PIN followed by #.
6. Repeat Step 5 to confirm the new PIN.
Example
* 1234 # 4321 # 4321 #
4.5.3 Card Format
To customise the system card formats:
5. If necessary, display the Organisation
Options window as described in the
Customisation section.
6. Select Card Format.
7. The following facilities are then available:
• Add a new card format
• Edit a card format.
• Delete a card format.
• Move a card format up or down
(determines validation order).
8. Select another option or close the window.
To add or edit a proximity reader card format, click here.
To add or edit a Magstripe card format, click here.
To add or edit a Wiegand (2601) card format, click here.

4.5.3.1 Proximity Reader
To add or edit a proximity reader card format:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation
Options window as described in the
Customisation section.
2. To add, select Card Format and the Add
button.
3. To edit, select Card Format > Proximity
Reader and Edit button or Proximity
Reader.
4. Enter the name and description of the
format
5. Select the type of format (i.e. Proximity
Reader).
6. Select the display mode.
7. Select another option or confirm the
changes.
4.5.3.2 Magnetic Stripe
To add or edit a Magnetic Stripe reader card format:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation
Options window as described in the
Customisation section.
2. To add, select Card Format and the Add
button.
3. To edit, select Card Format > Mag Stripe
and Edit button or Mag Stripe.
4. Enter the name and description of the
format.
5. Select the type of format (i.e. Magnetic
Stripe).
6. Select/deselect LRC Checking (i.e. is
longitudinal redundancy checking used?).
7. Select the display mode.
8. Select another option or confirm the
changes.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 39
Administration Software

9. Select the Layout tab.
10. Select token Start (the position of the first
character from the card's data that forms
part of the keycode) and Length (the
number of characters). For further
information, see the manufacturer's
documentation. For examples, click here.
If the length is changed after adding
keys, the keys will become invalid.
11. Select/deselect Facility Code. If selected,
specify the facility code start and length. If
Facility Code is specified then an access
group can be selected to determine what
access should be granted for all cards
using the specified facility code.
12. Select/deselect Issue Code. If selected,
specify the issue code start and length.
13. Select/deselect the Issue Code Look
Ahead. If selected, specify the Offset (the
value added to the issue code when the
New Issue button on the Keyholder Keys
page is selected) and Range (determines
the maximum issue code allowed, e.g.
offset 1 range 3 then 1,2,3 and 4 are valid
issue codes).
14. The token length is automatically
calculated (start+facility code length+issue
code length) but can be increased.
The bars at the bottom indicates the following:
16. Select another option or close the window.
Examples of start and length
Start: 1
Length: 9
Data: 123456789
=> Keycode is: 123456789
..
Start: 1
Length: 9
Data: 123456789012345690123456789
=> Keycode is: 123456789
Data after the 9 th digit is ignored as this is not part of the token format data
Start: 3
Length: 9
Data: 123456789012345690123456789
=> Keycode is: 345678901
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 40
Administration Software

Keycode starts from the 3rd digit and is 9 digits long
Start: 7
Length: 4
Data: 123456789012345690123456789
=> Keycode is: 7890
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 41
Administration Software
Start: 5
Length: 4
Data: 115000213
=> Keycode is: 21
The keycode data has some leading zeros, which means the keycode is 0021. As the keycode
is numerical the leading 0’s add nothing to the keycode, making the keycode value 21.
When encoding to cards, keycodes are padded with leading zeros to the full keycode
length.
Start: 5
Length: 5
Keycode: 385
=> Data will be written as: 000000385
4 zeros to get to the start position, and 2 more leading zeros pad out the keycode to make it the
full 5 digits in length.
When encoding to cards, keycodes get padded with zeros to make them work.
Start: 5
Length: 5
Keycode: 385
=> Data will be written as: 000000385
4 zeros move the start along, and 2 more zeros pad out the keycode to make it 5 digits in
length.
4.5.3.3 Wiegand (2601 format)
Note
If using 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers, the standard Wiegand card format used
with the door controllers must be used for all controllers on the system.
To add or edit a Wiegand reader card format:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation
Options window as described in the
Customisation section.
2. To add, select Card Format and the Add
button.
3. To edit, select Card Format > Wiegand
(2601) and Edit button or Wiegand
(2601).
4. If necessary, select the Details tab.
5. Enter the name and description of the
format
6. Select the type of format (i.e. Wiegand
(2601)).
7. Select Custom Wiegand, Universal
Wiegand, or Corporate HID.
8. Select the display mode.
If Custom Wiegand is selected, the layout can be specified:

1. Select the Layout tab. Note: If Wiegand
Universal is selected this tab is not
displayed.
2. Select token Start (the position of the first
character from the card's data that forms
part of the keycode) and Length (the
number of characters). For further
information, see the manufacturer's
documentation. For examples, click here.
If the length is changed after adding
keys, the keys will become invalid.
3. Select/deselect Facility Code. If selected,
specify the facility code start and length. If
Facility Code is specified then an access
group can be selected to determine what
access should be granted for all cards
using the specified facility code.
4. Select/deselect Issue Code. If selected,
specify the issue code start and length.
5. The token length is automatically
calculated (start+facility code length+issue
code length) but can be increased.
6. Select/deselect Number Even Parity. If
selected, specify the number of bits to use
in the even parity check.
7. Select/deselect Number Odd Parity. If
selected, specify the number of bits to use
in the odd parity check.
The bar at the bottom indicates the following:
8. Select another option or close the window.
4.5.3.4 Adding or Editing a Card Format
To add or edit a card format:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in the
Customisation section.
2. To add, select Card Format and the Add button.
3. To edit, select Card Format > card type and Edit button.
4. If necessary, select the Details tab.
For details of a proximity reader card format, click here.
For details of a Magstripe card format, click here.
For details of a Wiegand (2601) card format, click here.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 42
Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 43
Administration Software
4.5.4 Event Archiving
Note
This window defines when and where events are archived but is only displayed if the user
has Installer or Supervisor privileges.
To customise the system archive configuration:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation
Options window as described in the
Customisation section.
2. Select Event Archiving.
3. Specify the Maximum log size (event
count) used by manual archive only.
4. If archiving is not required, select the
Discard All Events (Do not archive)
check box.
5. If archiving is required, enter the Default
archive location or use the browse
facility. The archive file is automatically
named Edate.csv.
6. Specify the Keep Archives For (i.e. the
time in years to keep archive files).
7. Select the Enable automatic archiving
check box.
8. If regular archives are required, specify
the Archive events older than in days
and the Minimum no. of events to
archive. For example, if 7 days are
specified, events occurring less than 7
days ago are not automatically archived
and remain in the event log until they are 7
days old.
Note
If events are to be discarded on archive,
ensure that Archive events older than is
set to at least 120 days.
9. Select another option or close the window.
Only one archive can be performed each day and automatic archiving is not possible
until at least Archive events older than (e.g. 7) days of events are available.
Automatic archives are then performed 18:00 only if the minimum number of events to
archive are available and a manual archive has not been performed that day.

4.5.5 Alarm Responses
To customise the alarm responses:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation
Options window as described in the
Customisation section.
2. Select Alarm Responses.
3. To add an alarm response text, select the
Add button and enter the new alarm
response text.
4. To delete an alarm response text, select
the text and the Delete button.
5. Select another option or close the window.
4.5.6 System Access
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 44
Administration Software
It is recommended to take a backup of the database before changing the access type
because information could be lost (e.g. access groups and areas).
To customise the system access:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation
Options window as described in the
Customisation section.
2. Select System Access.
3. Select the Access defined by option.
4. Select the Access based on option.
5. Select another option or close the window.
4.5.7 Organisational Unit Details
To customise the organisational unit details:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation
Options window as described in the
Customisation section.
2. If necessary, select the organisational
unit.
3. Enter the organisational unit name.
4. Enter the organisational unit description.
5. Select the start of the week.
6. Select the time zone.
7. Select the default card format.
8. If licensed for Event to Action:
• Enter the E-mail address that will send
the message generated by the Event
to Action facility.
• Enter the name of the SMTP server
that uses Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol to send the Email.
9. Select another option or confirm the
changes.

4.5.8 Access
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 45
Administration Software
To customise the organisational unit access options:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation
Options window as described in the
Customisation section.
2. Select Access.
3. Select/deselect Enable Anti-Passback
Reset Time. If selected, specify Anti-
Passback Reset Time of Day.
4. Select/deselect Enable Denied Access
Counting. If selected, specify the number
of Attempts allowed and the Lockdown
Time in minutes if the number of failed
attempts is exceeded.
5. Select the another option or close the
window.
4.5.9 Custom Labels
Note
Changing the module names will affect the names in the Explorer bar (e.g. Keyholders
could be changed to Personnel). Also some of the tab labels may be changed (e.g.
Category could be changed to Department).
To customise the organisational unit module names:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation
Options window as described in the
Customisation section.
2. Select Custom Labels.
3. Enter the new names for the available
customised labels.
4. Select another option or confirm the
changes.

4.5.10 Categories
To customise the organisational unit categories:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation
Options window as described in the
Customisation section.
2. Select Categories (or relevant
customised label).
3. The following facilities are then available:
• Add a new category by selecting Add
and entering a new name and
description.
• Edit a category by editing the name
and description.
• Delete a category by selecting the
category and Delete.
• Design an ID card for the selected
category by selecting the button
(see the ID Card Designer section).
4. If areas are assigned to a 500 channel:
• Limit the number of times a keyholder
in the selected category is allowed to
enter the area by selecting an area,
selecting the checkbox and
incrementing the limit.
• Reset the area usage for all
keyholders in this category by
selecting the button.
• If the Priority Keyholders check box
is selected, keyholders in this
category are always downloaded to
the 512 controllers. Otherwise,
keyholders are downloaded on
demand.
5. Select another option or confirm the
changes.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 46
Administration Software

4.5.11 Keyholder Extra Details
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 47
Administration Software
Note
The fields are displayed in the Keyholder Property Page when the Extra Information
tab is selected (see the Keyholder Extra Information section) but only the first 5 fields
can be displayed in the Keyholder List View (see the Keyholder List View section).
To customise the organisational unit keyholder information:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation
Options window as described in the
Customisation section.
2. Select Keyholder Extra Details (or
relevant customised label).
3. Select the number of fields required.
4. Enter a description of the information to be
included in the column.
5. Enter the size of the column. Alternatively,
use the increment/decrement buttons to
set the required size.
6. Select another option or confirm the
changes.
4.5.12 Alarms
To customise the organisational unit alarms:
1. If necessary, display the
Organisation Options window as
described in the Customisation
section.
2. Select Alarms.
3. The following facilities are then
available:
• Specify the duration of the alarm
sound.
• Test the alarm sound ( starts
the alarm sound and
the alarm sound).
stops
• Change the alarm sound (select
the Change button and select a
.wav file).
• Reset the alarm sound (select the
Reset button).
4. Select another option or confirm the
changes.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 48
Administration Software
If alarm management has been licensed, the alarm points that are not assigned to an area for
monitoring by the Alarm Viewer can be specified for monitoring via the System Alarms
window:
1. Select Alarms > Detail.
2. Select the Show alarm dialog for
unmanaged alarms checkbox.
3. Select which events are alarms and
will be displayed in the System
Alarms window.
4. Select another option or confirm the
changes.
If alarm vi has not been licensed, the events to be classed as alarms can be specified and thus
monitoring via the System Alarms window:
1. Select Alarms > Detail.
2. Select which events are alarms and
will be displayed in the System
Alarms window.
3. Select another option or confirm the
changes.

4.6 Organisational Units
4.6.1 Organisational Units List
Note
This facility is only available if licensed for more than one organisational unit.
To display the organisational unit list:
• Select Tools > Configure
Organisations and the
Configure Organisations
window is displayed.
Further information is given in the Configure Organisations section.
4.6.2 Organisational Unit Details
Note
This facility is only available if licensed for more than one organisational unit
To add/edit/delete an organisational unit:
1. Select Tools > Configure
Organisations and the
Configure Organisations
window is displayed.
2. Perform one of the following:
• To add, select the Add New
button and enter the
organisation’s details.
• To edit, select the
organisation and Edit button
and enter the new details.
• To delete, select the
organisation and Delete
button.
3. Select the OK or Apply button.
Further information is given in the Configure Organisations section.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 49
Administration Software

4.7 Keyholders
4.7.1 Keyholder List View
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 50
Administration Software
On initial viewing, the Keyholder List View displays information on keyholders in columns and
is in alphabetical order.
General facilities are described in the List View section.
Note
The first 5 extra information fields can be displayed in the keyholder list view using the
Customisation facilities. All the extra information fields are displayed in the Keyholder
Property Page (see the Keyholder Extra Information section).
To display information on a keyholder:
• Select a keyholder in the Keyholder List View and the appropriate information will be
displayed in the Keyholder Property Page.
To search for a keyholder:
• Click here.
Other facilities are described in List View section.
4.7.2 Keyholder Property Page
4.7.2.1 Keyholder Details
The Keyholder Property Page is used to define keyholders (e.g. personal details and access
group). The identification information is displayed on initial selection.
Note
Some labels and table names may have been changed by customisation.
To display details information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
The following can then be specified:
Title The title of the keyholder (selected from a drop-down list).
Last Name The last name of the keyholder (specified by data entry).
First Name The first name of the keyholder (specified by data entry).
Initials The initials of the keyholder (specified by data entry).
Start Date The date and time the keyholder started employment or visiting (entered by
data entry and drop-down calendar). Enabled/disabled by selecting its
check box. If enabled, access is not allowed until the specified date and
time but events (e.g. an attempt to enter) are reported.
End Date The date and time the keyholder ended employment or visiting (entered by
data entry and drop-down calendar). Enabled/disabled by selecting its
check box. If enabled, access is no longer allowed after the specified date
and time but events (e.g. an attempt to enter) are still reported.
Category The category of the keyholder (selected from a drop-down list). The
Customisation facilities can be used to create/edit categories.
The category determines the format of the ID card (see the Photo ID

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 51
Administration Software
Module helpfile).
Photo A photo of the keyholder.
The photo can be captured from an image file, Twain device or Video
device using the Capture button (see the Image Capture helpfile).
A previously-captured photo can be cleared by selecting the Clear button.
A previously-created photo ID card for the keyholder can be printed by
selecting the Print ID Card button. For further information, see the
Keyholder List View section.
Security Level 1 The security level of the keyholder (selected by increments 0 to 9, 0
preventing access to all areas).
Requires Extra
Door Time
1 Access by Security Level mode only
An indication of whether the keyholder requires extra time to get through
the door (specified by check box).
To forgive an anti-passback violation by this keyholder:
1. Select the Tasks button
2. Select Anti-Passback Forgive
To display a photo ID card print preview:
1. Select a keyholder (or keyholders) and File > Preview ID Card in the menus, or right click
on a keyholder (or keyholders) and select the Preview ID Card option and the Print
window is displayed.
2. Select a printer and the OK button and the Print Preview window is displayed. To print the
card(s), select the icon.
To print photo ID card(s):
1. Select a keyholder and the Print ID Card button on the Details tab, or select a keyholder
and File > Print ID Card in the menus, or right click on a keyholder and select the Print ID
Card option. If more than one keyholder is selected, the Print ID Card button cannot be
selected.
2. Select a printer and the OK button. If one keyholder is selected, followed by the Print ID
Card button, the Print Preview window is displayed. To print the card, select the icon.
If using a single-sided card printer, the front is printed first and a message asking if the back is
to be printed is displayed. After the front is printed, turn the card over, load it to the printer and
select Yes; if the back is not required, select No.
For information on batch printing, click here.
To encode a magnetic stripe card using a MSR206 Magnetic Stripe Card Writer:
• Select a keyholder and Keyholders > Encode Keycode in the menus or right click on
a keyholder and select Encode Keycode and the Encode Keycode window is
displayed (see the Encode Keycode section).
To print and encode a magnetic stripe card using an Eltron P420 Card Printer:
• Click here (link to TB114 info)
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete keyholders:
Click here.

4.7.2.2 Keyholder Personal Details
To display personal details information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Personal Details tab.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 52
Administration Software
The following can then be specified:
Employee Number The employee (staff) number of the keyholder (specified by data entry).
Date of Birth The date of birth of the keyholder (specified by data entry or drop-down
calendar).
Home Tel. The home telephone number of the keyholder (specified by data entry).
Work Tel. The work telephone number of the keyholder (specified by data entry).
Mobile Tel. The mobile telephone number of the keyholder (specified by data entry).
e-Mail The e-Mail address of the keyholder (specified by data entry).
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete keyholders:
Click here.

4.7.2.3 Keyholder Keys
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 53
Administration Software
If an administration reader is to be used to add key codes, an administration reader must be
connected and configured (see Configure Peripherals section).
If the Search bar is displayed in the list view, the Key Code check box must be deselected (see
the Keyholder List View section).
If adding magnetic stripe cards, ensure that the position and length are specified first (see
the Magnetic Stripe section).
If a 1100/2100/2200 master controller has been configured on the administration kit
channel, keys cannot be added if the master controller is not connected or communicating. If
this occurs, deselect the Online checkbox on the master controller Details tab.
To display keys information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Keys tab.
4. The following facilities are then available:
• Specify the PIN number to be used with
OneProx readers that support userdefined
PINs by clicking the Set PIN
button. The PIN number can be cleared
by selecting next to the Set PIN
button.
The PIN number to be used with the
legacy Stanley PIN reader cannot be
changed and is only displayed when the
PIN field is selected.
• Enable/disable a key by
selecting/deselecting a check box. If the
key is disabled, the key will not open
any door.
• Add a new key by presenting the key to
the administration reader or by selecting
Add New and entering the key code.
The PIN number is calculated from the
keycode but is only displayed when the
PIN field is selected. The card format
can be selected from a drop-down list.
• If Magnetic Stripe keys are being used
and Issue Code Look Ahead has been
specified, a New Issue button is
displayed for when a new issue code is
required.
• Delete a key by selecting next to
the key.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete keyholders:
Click here.

4.7.2.4 Keyholder Access Groups
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 54
Administration Software
This tab is only displayed in Access by Access Groups mode (see Access Type section).
Notes
1. Before access groups can be allocated to a keyholder, the access groups (see Access
Group Details section) must be defined first.
2. If using 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers, only one access group per keyholder
can be assigned.
To display access group information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Access Group tab.
To allocate access groups to the keyholder:
• Select the appropriate check box(es).
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete keyholders:
Click here.
4.7.2.5 Keyholder Guest Access
This tab is only displayed in Access by Access Groups mode (see Access Type section) and
when multiple organisational units are licensed.
Notes
1. Before guest access groups can be allocated to a keyholder, the access groups (see
Access Group Details section) must be defined in the other organisational unit.
2. If using 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers, only one access group per keyholder
can be assigned.
To display guest access information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Guest Access tab.
To allocate guest access groups to the keyholder:
1. Select the organisational unit and a list of available access groups in that organisational unit
is displayed.
2. Select the appropriate check box(es).
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete keyholders:
Click here.

4.7.2.6 Keyholder Personal Access
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 55
Administration Software
This tab is only displayed in Access by Access Groups mode (see Access Type section).
To display personal access information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Personal Access tab.
Note
The number of time profiles that can be
allocated to a personal access group is
2 (i.e. 2 columns).
To allocate access:
1. Select the Profile 1 check box.
2. Select the time profile from the drop-down list. Selecting 'None' will allow access to the
selected areas at all times.
3. Specify the areas the time profile applies to by selecting/deselecting the area check boxes.
4. If access to areas in other organisational units is to be granted, select the More button and
the Additional Areas window is displayed. Select the organisational unit and specify the
areas by selecting/deselecting the area check boxes.
If required, repeat for Profile 2.
Note
A keyholder's time profile can be used in conjunction with a PIN reader to limit access but
a valid key and PIN is always required to gain access during that time profile.
Time profiles do not apply to the legacy Stanley PIN Reader. The legacy Stanley
PIN Reader is the only reader that can be used with 1100/2100/2200 Series Door
Controllers.
To display the time profile:
1. Right click on the column heading.
2. The following facilities are then available:
• Display the time profile by selecting Show Details.
• Go to the Time Profile Property Page by selecting Navigate To.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete keyholders:
Click here.

4.7.2.7 Keyholder Notes
To display notes information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Notes tab.
Notes can then be typed in.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete keyholders:
Click here.
4.7.2.8 Keyholder Extra Information
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 56
Administration Software
This tab is only displayed if extra information fields have been defined using the Customisation
facilities.
To display extra information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Extra Information tab.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete keyholders:
Click here.
4.7.2.9 Keyholder Events
To display recent events information for this keyholder:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Events tab.
The latest 10 events associated with the
keyholder are then displayed.
To update the display:
• Select the Refresh button.
To select which columns to display:
1. Right click on the column heading.
2. Select which columns to display from the drop-down menu.
To toggle the event order:
• Select the column heading and the triangle will toggle for ascending or descending order.

To display information on the keyholder that generated the event:
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 57
Administration Software
• Right click on the event and select Show Details for keyholder or Navigate to keyholder
from the drop-down menu.
To display controller time:
• Select the Controller Time radio button.
To display system time:
• Deselect the Controller Time radio button.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete keyholders:
Click here.
4.7.2.10 Keyholder Area Usage
This tab is only displayed in Access by Areas mode (see Access Type section) and requires a
500 TCP/IP channel to operate.
To display area usage information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Area Usage tab.
The following is then displayed:
Name The name of the area.
Default The default number of entries this keyholder is allowed to make
into this area (specified by category customisation).
Note
The keyholder must have the same category as that set up in
customisation. If the keyholder has no category or the category
default has not been specified, this field is blank.
Remaining The remaining number of entries this keyholder is allowed to
make into this area (specified by data entry or increments and
automatically updated when display is refreshed).
To allow entry into the area if the limit has been reached:
• Select the Reset button.
• Select the Update button and the 'remaining' value is reset to the 'default' value.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete keyholders:
Click here.

4.7.3 Add/Update/Delete a Keyholder
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 58
Administration Software
Note
1. If an administration reader is to be used to add key codes (see Keyholder Keys
section), an administration reader must be connected and configured (see Configure
Peripherals section).
2. If the Search bar is displayed in the list view, the Key Code check box must be
deselected.
• Select the Keyholder module.
To add a keyholder:
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.
2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information (select a property page field and
press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Add.
To update a keyholder:
1. Select a keyholder (the Search icon can be used to find the keyholder).
2. Select each tab in turn and enter/update appropriate information (select a property page
field and press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or select Cancel to discard changes.
To delete a keyholder:
1. Select a keyholder (the Search facility can be used to find the keyholder).
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the keyholder.

4.8 Guests
This module is only displayed if multiple organisational units have been defined, see the
Configure Organisations section.
The Guests Page is used to allow a keyholder from a different organisational unit to enter
areas in this organisational unit.
To display guest details:
1. Select the Guests module.
2. Select the Search for a Keyholders in
other Organisations checkbox.
3. Enter the Last Name of the guest.
4. Select the Organisation the guest
belongs to.
5. Select the Search button and a list of
keyholders that match the search criteria
is displayed.
6. Select the keyholder who is to be a
allowed access and (if necessary) select
the Details tab.
To specify access to a guests:
• Select the Access tab and select the
access group required by the guest to
enter areas (possibly restricted by time
profile) in this organisational unit.
To display read-only details of the guest’s
personal access:
• Select the Personal Access tab.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 59
Administration Software

4.9 Operators
4.9.1 Operator List View
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 60
Administration Software
The Operator List View displays a list of Administration Software users. An operator must also
be a keyholder. The operator privileges determine which functions the user can access.
Functions that cannot be accessed are greyed out.
See List View section.
4.9.2 Operator Property Page
4.9.2.1 Operator Details
The Operator Property Page is used to define Administration Software users (e.g. the
functions they are allowed to access). The details information is displayed on initial selection.
To display details information:
1. Select the Operator module.
2. Select a user in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
The following can then be specified:
Login Name The type of user (specified by data entry). Specify a
password for the user by selecting Set Password.
Keyholder Name The keyholder who is also an operator (specified by
searching for an existing keyholder or selecting Create New
and creating a new keyholder). A keyholder can only be
assigned one set of operator privileges per organisational
unit.
Expiry Date The date the operator privileges will be removed from the
keyholder (specified by data entry and drop-down calendar).
Auto-Logout Delay (mins) If selected, the operator will be logged out automatically if
the system is not used for the specified time (range 1 to 120
minutes, specified by checkbox and data entry or
increments).
Note
If this value is changed, the updated value takes affect after
the next login.
Key Login Allowed An indication of whether a key can be used to login
(specified by check box).
Key Login Required An indication of whether a key must be used to login
(specified by check box).
Password Expired An indication of whether the password has expired and a
new password must be specified (specified by check box).
Account Disabled An indication of whether the user is prevented from logging
in (specified by check box).
Last Login The date of the last login (automatically entered).

To set a password:
1. Select the Set Password button and the
Set Password window is displayed.
2. Enter the new password (at least 6
characters) and confirm password.
3. Select OK.
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete operators:
Click here.
4.9.2.2 Operator Privileges
To display privileges information:
1. Select the Operator module.
2. Select a user in the List View.
3. Select the Privileges tab.
To allocate privileges:
1. If multiple organisational units exist, select
the Organisation.
2. Select a Privilege Template from the
drop-down list:
Installer - All facilities
Supervisor - All facilities except write
hardware facilities.
Security Manager - Read access to all
facilities except Operators, Event
Archiving and Audit Trail; plus write
access to keyholders, access groups,
areas, time/mode profiles, holiday
profiles.
Manager - Read access to all facilities
except Operators; plus write access to
keyholders and add access to event
archiving.
Hardware Manager – Write access to
hardware module and read access to
alarm and event facilities.
Operator - Write access to all facilities
except Hardware, Alarm Map Designer,
Card Designer, Event to Action and Audit
Trail.
Monitor - Event log facilities only and
read only access to time profiles, holiday
profiles, areas, channels, controllers and
doors.
Guard - Alarm Viewer and no autologout.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 61
Note
Administration Software
If specifying an installer or supervisor,
system customisation is only allowed if
installer/supervisor privileges are given
to all organisational units.

Guest Administrator – Write access to
guest facilities.
Guest - Read access only. No access to
Database Backup, Alarm Viewer, Alarm
Map Designer, Event to Action, Card
Designer, Event Archiving, and Audit
Trail.
No privilege – Cannot access the
organisational unit.
3. Select/deselect the System Administrator
checkbox to enable/disable the ability to
perform administration tasks.
4. Repeat for each organisational unit (No
privilege is the default).
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete operators:
Click here.
4.9.2.3 Operator Alarm Viewer
To display alarm viewer information:
1. Select the Operator module.
2. Select a user in the List View.
3. Select the Alarm Viewer tab.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 62
Administration Software
Note
A guest administrator must be given a
privilege that allows logon to a different
organisational unit. For example,
Manager in Org 1 and Guest
Administrator in Org 2 will allow logon to
Org 1 only; when logged on to Org 1, the
Guest Administrator privileges will allow
access rights to be assigned to guests
from Org 2.
The following can then be specified:
Note
Any changes take affect after the next login.
Pop up window An indication whether an alarm pop-up window is displayed when an
when alarms are alarm is generated (specified by check box).
activated
Use flashing icons An indication whether the alarm icon flashes when an alarm is
generated (specified by check box).
Disable alarm An indication whether the alarm sound is disabled for this operator
sounds
(specified by check box).
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete operators:
Click here.

4.9.3 Add/Update/Delete an Operator
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 63
Administration Software
• Select the Operator module.
To add an operator:
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.
2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information (select a property page field and
press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Add.
To update an operator:
1. Select an operator.
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
To delete an operator:
1. Select an operator.
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the operator.

4.9.4 Specifying a Keyholder as an Operator
When specifying a keyholder as an operator there are three methods of searching for the
keyholder.
Auto-Selection
1. Start to type in the keyholder name and the system guesses the rest of the name.
2. Accept the name or carry on typing.
Dropdown Button
• Select the icon to choose from a drop-down list.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 64
Administration Software
• The last option in the list is ... which displays the Advanced Keyholder Selection window.
Advanced Search Button
1. Select the icon and the Advanced
Keyholder Selection window is
displayed.
2. Enter search criteria (e.g. last name).
3. If searching for a key code, select the Key
Code check box and card format. Then
present the key to the administration
reader or enter the key code.
4. Select the Search button and all
keyholders matching the search are listed.
5. Select the required keyholder and the
Select button.
To perform a new search:
1. Select the Reset button.
2. Enter new search criteria.
3. Select the Search button.
To close the window:
• Select the Close button.

4.10 Time & Mode Profiles
4.10.1 Time & Mode Profile List View
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 65
Administration Software
The Time & Mode Profile List View displays a list of time and mode profiles. A time profile can
be applied to a keyholder or door. A mode profile can be applied to an area, door or reader. For
further information on the modes that can be applied, click area, door or reader.
When a time profile is applied to a keyholder (or access group) it determines when a keyholder
has access through a door. When a mode profile is applied to an area, door or reader, it
determines the mode (e.g. area armed or disarmed, door open or closed). For further
information on the modes that can be applied, click area, door or reader.
A time profile simply specifies a series of active time periods, each of which can span any
period with a week or a holiday. In addition to this a mode (door or reader) profile specifies a set
of properties to be applied during each time period.
A time/mode profile consists of one or more time periods that can span multiple days. A holiday
profile can be assigned to a time/mode profile to limit access during holiday periods.
See List View section.
4.10.2 Time & Mode Profile Property Page
4.10.2.1 Daily Time Profiles
The Daily Time Profile Property Page is displayed on systems that include at least one
1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controller.
Up to four different time profiles can be specified (e.g. profile 1 for morning access, profile 2 for
evening access, profile 3 for Saturday access, profile 4 for Sunday access).
Note
This type of profile is not applicable to mode profiles.
To display daily time profile information:
1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module.
2. Select a time profile in the List View.
The following can then be specified:
Name The name of the time profile (specified by data entry, e.g. At all Times,
Office Hours, Early Morning, Evening Night, etc.).
Description A description of the time profile (specified by data entry).
Start Time The start time of the time profile (specified by data entry or increments).
The Profile check box must be selected.
End Time The end time of the time profile (specified by data entry or increments).
Sunday to Saturday The days of the week the time profile applies to (specified by check
boxes).
No Holiday Profile An indication of whether a holiday profile is not used (selected by radio
button). If selected, the time profile applies through any holidays.
Use Holiday Profile An indication of whether the holiday profile is used. Only one holiday
profile can be specified for 1100/2100/2200 systems. If selected, no

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 66
Administration Software
access is granted during the holiday periods defined by the holiday
profile.
To add/update/delete time profiles:
Click here.
4.10.2.2 Weekly Time Profiles
The Weekly Time Profile Property Page is displayed on systems that do not use
1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers.
To display time profile information:
1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module.
2. Select a time profile in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Week tab.
The following can then be specified:
Name The name of the time profile (specified by data entry, e.g. At all Times,
Office Hours, Early Morning, Evening Night, etc.).
Description A description of the time profile (specified by data entry).
Sunday to Saturday A graphical representation of the start and end times of access for each
day of the week (specified by selecting an area in the bar and dragging
(start of week may
with the mouse button pressed down). A bar represents the start and
have been changed
end times for access and may cover more than one day and occur more
by customisation)
than once in a day (e.g. allowed access in the morning and evening but
not during the day). The start and end times can be changed by
selecting and dragging the left or right edge. The boxes at the bottom of
the display show the day and time of the start and end of the selected
time period and can be used to alter the specification or fine tune it.
Notes
1. The arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to move between bars.
2. Shift + arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to resize the bars.
3. Ctrl + arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to move the bars.
To insert a bar:
• Right click on a day and select New from the drop-down menu, press the Insert key on the
keyboard or click inside the day at the required start point and, keeping the left mouse
button pressed, drag the cursor to the required end time then release the mouse button.
To cut/copy/paste a bar:
1. Right click on a bar and select Cut or Copy from the drop-down menu.
2. Right click on a day and select Paste from the drop-down menu.
or
• Press the Ctrl key, select a bar and drag it to the new position while holding the Ctrl key
to copy the bar to a new day.
• Press the Shift key, select a bar and drag it to the new position while holding the Shift
key to move the bar to a new day.

To delete a bar:
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 67
Administration Software
• Right click on a bar and select Delete from the drop-down menu, press the Delete key on
the keyboard or select Edit > Delete Current Record on the main menu.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete time profiles:
Click here.
4.10.2.3 Mode Profiles
To display a mode profile information:
1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module..
2. Select a mode profile in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Week tab.
The following can then be specified:
Name The name of the mode profile (specified by data entry).
Description A description of the mode profile (specified by data entry).
Sunday to Saturday A graphical representation of the start and end times of the mode
(determined by the Mode field) for each day of the week (specified by
(start of week may
selecting an area in the bar and dragging with the mouse button
have been changed
pressed down). A bar represents the start and end times for the mode
by customisation)
and may cover more than one day and occur more than once in a day
(e.g. allowed access in the morning and evening but not during the day).
The start and end times can be changed by selecting and dragging the
left or right edge. The boxes at the bottom of the display show the day
and time of the start and end of the selected time period and can be
used to alter the specification or fine tune it.
Access Options The options that are to be applied to the specified times during the time
period. These options depend on the type of mode profile:
Area Mode Profile
Door Mode Profile
Reader Mode Profile
Notes
1. The arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to move between bars.
2. Shift + arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to resize the bars.
3. Ctrl + arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to move the bars.
To insert a bar:
• Right click on a day and select New from the drop-down menu or press the Insert key on
the keyboard.
To cut/copy/paste a bar:
1. Right click on a bar and select Cut or Copy from the drop-down menu.
2. Right click on a day and select Paste from the drop-down menu.
or
• Press the Ctrl key, select a bar and drag it to the new position while holding the

Ctrl key to copy the bar to a new day.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 68
Administration Software
• Press the Shift key, select a bar and drag it to the new position while holding the
Shift key to move the bar to a new day.
To delete a bar:
• Right click on a bar and select Delete from the drop-down menu, press the Delete key on
the keyboard or select Edit > Delete Current Record on the main menu.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete mode profiles:
Click here.
4.10.2.4 Area Mode Profile Access Options
Mode The area access mode (armed or disarmed) that is applied to the
specified time periods (selected from a drop-down list).
Airlock Airlock can be applied to the area for the specified time periods
(selected by checkbox).
Anti-passback Anti-passback can be applied to the area for the specified time periods
(selected by checkbox).
4.10.2.4.1 Door Mode Profile Access Options
Mode The door mode (open, first open, bolted or anti-passback) that is
applied to the specified times (selected from a drop-down list).
4.10.2.4.2 Reader Mode Profile Access Options
Mode The reader access mode (PIN, token, PIN or token, or PIN and token)
that is applied to the specified times (selected from a drop-down list).
Mode profiles do not apply to the legacy Stanley PIN Reader. The
legacy Stanley PIN Reader is the only reader that can be used with
1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers.
Two Key Access If this checkbox is selected, two valid keys are required for access..
4.10.2.5 Holiday Time Profile
The Holiday Time Profile Property Page is displayed on systems that do not use
1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers. Holiday profiles can be assigned to a time/mode
profile to allow/restrict access during holiday periods.
Notes
1. If a holiday profile is to be assigned to the time/mode profile, the holiday profile (see
Holiday Profile Property Page section) must be defined first.
2. If the start and end times for the holiday period (specified below) overlap the time profile,
the holiday period overrides the time period . For example, if a time period allows
access up to 20:00 but the holiday profile prevents access after 18:00, access will be
prevented after 18:00 during the holiday period.

To display holiday time profile information:
1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module.
2. Select a time/mode profile in the List
View.
3. Select the Holiday tab.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 69
or
Administration Software
The following can then be specified:
Holiday Profiles A list of holiday profiles that can be assigned to the time/mode profile
(selected by check box).
Holiday Profile The name of the selected holiday profile (automatically entered).
Start and End Times A graphical representation of the start and end times of mode for
each day of the holiday period(s) (specified by selecting an area in
the bar and dragging with the mouse button pressed down). A bar
represents the start and end times for access (e.g. allowed access in
the morning and evening but not during the day). The start and end
times can be changed by selecting and dragging the left or right
edge. The boxes at the bottom of the display show the day and time
of the start and end of the selected holiday period and can be used
to alter the specification or fine tune it.
Access Options 1 The access that is applied to the specified times during the holiday
period. The access options depend on the type of mode profile:
Area Mode Profile
Door Mode Profile
Reader Mode Profile
1 mode profiles only

4.10.3 Add/Update/Delete a Time/Mode Profile
• Select the Time & Mode Profile module.
To add a time/mode profile:
1. Select one of the following:
New > Create New Simple Time Profile
New > Create New Area Time Profile
New > Create New Door Mode Profile
New > Create New Reader Mode Profile
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 70
Administration Software
Select the icon (defaults to a new time profile) or the option arrow to select Create
New Time Profile, Create New Door Mode Profile or Create New Reader Mode Profile.
Select Edit > Create a New Record and select Create New Time Profile, Create New
Door Mode Profile or Create New Reader Mode Profile.
2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information (select a property page field and
press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Add.
To update a time/mode profile:
1. Select a time/mode profile.
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S or select the icon to save changes or Cancel to discard
changes.
To delete a time/mode profile:
1. Select a time/mode profile.
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D or select the icon.
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the time/mode profile.

4.11 Holiday Profiles
4.11.1 Holiday Profile List View
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 71
Administration Software
The Holiday Profile List View displays a list of holiday profiles but only one holiday profile is
allowed if the system is using 1100/2100/2200 controllers. A holiday profile can be applied to a
time profile and takes precedence over the time profile (e.g. if a keyholder has a time profile that
allows access at any time, access is still prevented at times specified by the holiday profile).
A holiday profile consists of one or more holiday periods that can span multiple days.
See List View section.
4.11.2 Holiday Profile Property Page
The Holiday Profiles Property Page is used to define holiday profiles (e.g. start and end
dates). A holiday profile can be applied to a time profile and will override it (prevent it from
functioning) if the time profile occurs on any of the dates defined in the holiday profile.
To display holiday profile information:
1. Select the Holiday Profile module.
2. Select a holiday profile in the List View.
The following can then be specified:
[ 1
512 only systems]
Name The name of the holiday profile (e.g. Standard, Personal).
Description A description of the holiday profile (specified by data entry).
Holiday Period Name The name of the holiday period (specified by data entry, e.g. Easter,
Christmas, etc.).
Start Date The start date of the holiday period (specified by data entry or dropdown
calendar).
Start Time 1 The start time of the holiday period (specified by data entry or by
increments).
End Date The end date of the holiday period (specified by data entry or dropdown
calendar).
End Time 1 The end time of the holiday period (specified by data entry or by
increments).
To create a holiday period:
• Select Add Holiday and specify the holiday period name and dates as described in the
above table. The holiday period must be in the future not the current date.
To delete a holiday period:
1. Select a holiday period from the Holiday Period Name list.
2. Select Delete Holiday.
To advance the holiday profile 1 year:
1. Select Add+1yr and all the holiday periods are advanced 1 year.

2. Edit any dates that have changed from the previous year (e.g. Easter).
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete holiday profiles:
Click here.
4.11.3 Add/Update/Delete a Holiday Profile
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 72
Administration Software
• Select the Holiday Profile module.
To add a holiday profile:
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Add.
To update a holiday profile:
1. Select a holiday profile.
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
To delete a holiday profile:
1. Select a holiday profile.
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the holiday profile.

4.12 Areas
4.12.1 Area List View
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 73
Administration Software
The Area List View and Property Page are only displayed in Access by Areas mode (see
Access Type section).
The Area List View displays a list of areas. An area is defined by the doors that allow entry into
it and exit out of it.
See List View section.
To move an area to a different part of the tree:
1. Ensure View > Tree View is selected.
2. Drag and drop the area in to the new position.
4.12.2 Area Property Page
4.12.2.1 Area Details
The Area Property Page is used to define or edit areas.
To display area information:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
The following can then be specified:
Name The name of the area (specified by data entry, e.g. Reception,
Development, etc.)
Areas names that contain only numbers are not recommended.
Description A description of the area (specified by data entry).
Parent Area The parent area this area belongs to in the hierarchical list of areas
(selected from drop-down list).
This area can be
used in personal
access in other
Organisations 1
An indication of whether the area can be accessed by keyholders from
other organisational units (specified by checkbox).
1
Only if licensed for multiple organisational units.
Door Access A list of associated doors (specified as described in the Access section
of the Door module). A list of associated readers can be displayed by
selecting next to a door.
Comms Failure The lock action in the area if the communications should fail. The options
Mode
are fail safe, fail secure or fail full fail secure (selected by radio button).
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete areas:
Click here.

4.12.2.2 Area Appearance
To display appearance information:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
3. Select the Appearance tab.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 74
Administration Software
The following can then be specified:
Area Icons Small and large icons to be used in the area (selected using the
Browse buttons to locate a graphic file). Default icons can be
used by selecting the Use default icons check box.
Area Colour The colour to be used on the alarm display board to identify which
area an alarm is associated with (selected using the Choose
button.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete areas:
Click here.
4.12.2.3 Area Alarm Management
This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a 500 channel (see the Channel
Areas) or 1100/2100/2200 controller (see Controller Alarm Management sections).
To display alarm management information:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
3. Select the Alarm Management tab.
The following can then be specified:
Arm Area Time Profile The time profile used to arm and disarm the area (selected from a
drop-down list).
Alarm Priority (1 to 99) The priority assigned to alarm (specified by data entry or
increments). 1 is the highest priority and 99 is the lowest priority.
Sounder resets when
area acknowledged
Sounder resets when
area reset
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete areas:
Click here.
If the check box is selected, the sounder for this area is reset
when the area alarm is acknowledged.
If the check box is selected, the sounder for this area is reset
when the area alarm is reset.

4.12.2.4 Area Alarm Definitions
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 75
Administration Software
This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a 500 channel (see the Channel
Areas) or 1100/2100/2200 controller (see Controller Alarm Management sections).
To display alarm definition information:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
3. Select the Alarm Definitions tab.
The following can then be specified:
Event Description A list of event descriptions associated with each alarm.
Always an Alarm An indication of whether the event is always an alarm (specified
by radio button).
Only when Armed An indication of whether the event is only an alarm when the area
is armed (specified by radio button).
To select all Always An Alarm radio buttons:
• Select the Always On button.
To select all Only When Armed radio buttons:
• Select the When Armed button.
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete areas:
Click here.
4.12.2.5 Area Alarm Points
This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a 500 channel (see the Channel
Areas) or 1100/2100/2200 controller (see Controller Alarm Management sections).
To display alarm points information:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
3. Select the Alarm Points tab.
The following are then displayed:
Alarm Points A name and description of alarm points assigned to the area
(automatically entered).
To assign alarm points to an area, see following sections:
• Door Alarm Management

• Channel Alarm Management
• Controller Alarm Management
• Controller Inputs
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete areas:
Click here.
4.12.2.6 Area Outputs
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 76
Administration Software
This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a 500 channel (see the Channel
Areas) or 1100/2100/2200 controller (see Controller Alarm Management sections).
To display outputs information:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
3. Select the Outputs tab.
The following are then displayed:
Area Sounders The names and description of outputs that activate sounders
assigned to the area (automatically entered).
Alarm Sensors Resets The names and description of outputs that reset inputs assigned
to the area (automatically entered).
To assign outputs to an area, see following section:
• Controller Outputs
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete areas:
Click here.

4.12.2.7 Area Management
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 77
Administration Software
This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a 500 channel (see the Channel
Areas section).
To specify anti-passback parameters:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
3. Select an Area Management tab.
Note
An anti-passback area mode profile
must be specified in the Alarm
Management tab.
The following can then be specified:
Timed Forgive (mins) The timeout period when anti-passback violations are cancelled
(specified by checkbox and by data entry or increments).
Disallow anti-passback
forgive
An indication of whether an operator cannot override an antipassback
violation in the area (specified by check box).
Tailgate reset An indication of whether an anti-passback violation in an area is
reset by presentation of the key into a different area, providing the
key is valid for that area and is not within the violated area
(specified by check box).
To specify the area as an airlock:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
3. Select an Area Management tab.
Note
An airlock area mode profile must be
specified in the Alarm Management
tab.
The following can then be specified:
Door The doors that determine the airlock (at least two must be
selected by checkbox)
No Entry The output that will be activated if entry through the door is
prohibited (selected from a drop-down list).
Normal The output that will be activated while in normal condition, i.e.
both doors locked and no key being presented (selected from a
drop-down list).
Enter The output that will be activated if entry through the door is
allowed (selected from a drop-down list).
Note
The outputs should be latched outputs with no maximum activation time or event-to
action to turn them off. To specify outputs, see the Controller Outputs section.

4.12.2.8 Area Security Level
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 78
Administration Software
This tab is only displayed in Access by Areas and Security Level mode (see Access Type
section).
To display access information:
4. Select the Area module.
5. Select an area in the List View.
6. Select the Security Level tab.
The following can then be specified:
Default Security Level The security level required to access the area outside the time
profile (specified by data entry or by increments).
Timed Security Level The security level required to access the area during the time
profile (specified by data entry or by increments).
Time Profile The time profile allocated to the area (selected from a drop-down
list).
Note
A security level of 0 prevents access to the area at any time by any key.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete areas:
Click here.
4.12.3 Add/Update/Delete an Area
• Select the Area module.
To add an area:
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Add.
To update an area:
1. Select an area.
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
To delete an area:
1. Select an area.
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the area.

4.13 Access Groups
4.13.1 Access Group List View
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 79
Administration Software
The Access Group List View and Property Page are only displayed in Access by Access
Groups mode (see Access Type section).
The Access Group List View displays a list of access groups. An access group is a group of
areas and may have a specific time profile associated with each group.
They are applied to a keyholder (see the Keyholder Access Groups section) to restrict the
movement of the keyholder to the areas contained in the access group at the times specified by
the associated time profiles (see the Keyholder Personal Access section).
See List View section.
4.13.2 Access Group Property Page
4.13.2.1 Access Group Details
The Access Group Property Page is used to define access groups (e.g. the areas associated
with each access group).
To display access group information:
1. Select the Access Group module.
2. Select an access group in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
Note
The number of access groups that can
be defined depends on the software
license and the hardware connected.
The following can then be specified:
Name The name of the access group name (e.g. Development Team, Night
Guard, Visitor, etc.).
Description A description of the access group (specified by data entry).
This access group is
available to other
Organisations 1
An indication of whether the access group can be used by keyholders
from other organisational units (specified by checkbox).
1
Only if licensed for multiple organisational units.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete access group:
Click here.
4.13.2.2 Access Group Access
To display time profiles information:
1. Select the Access Group module.
2. Select an access group in the List View.
3. Select the Access tab.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 80
Administration Software
The following can then be specified:
The Profile check box must be selected.
Time Profile The time profile to apply to the selected areas. The time profile is
selected from a drop-down list and the associated areas selected
by check box.
Areas A list of areas associated with the access group. The areas
associated with the time profile are selected by check box.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete access group:
Click here.
4.13.2.3 Access Group Advanced
To display advanced information:
1. Select the Access Group module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
3. Select the Advanced tab.
The following can then be specified:
Ignore bolted doors If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group opens a door any locked/bolted door conditions are
ignored.
Ignore anti-passback If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group opens a door any anti-passback conditions are ignored.
Ignore dead bolted doors If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group opens a door any deadbolt override/door bolted conditions
are ignored.
Ignore ‘Two Key Access’
mode
If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group opens a door any two key access requirements are
ignored.
Disarm privilege If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group opens a door the area is disarmed.
Ignore airlocks If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group opens a door any airlocks are ignored.
The following conditions will only apply when access is not controlled by airlock, anti-passback,
area usage limits, or two-key access:
Allow passage mode If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group presents the key twice within the Lock Release Time (LRT)
the door is unlocked and remains unlocked until the key is
presented twice again. This time must be > 3s.
Passage mode can only be cancelled by presenting the key
twice therefore a door opened using the passage mode facility
will not be closed by a time or mode profile's end time.
Allow first token unlock If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group opens a door the door remains unlocked.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 81
Administration Software
To add/update/delete access group:
Click here.
4.13.3 Add/Update/Delete an Access Group
The appropriate areas and time profiles must be created first.
• Select the Access Group module.
To add an access group:
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Add.
To update an access group
1. Select an access group.
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
To delete an access group:
1. Select an access group.
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the access group.

4.14 Hardware
4.14.1 Hardware List View
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 82
Administration Software
The Hardware List View displays a list of channels and controllers. The Connected
Controllers list can be expanded to display connected controllers, doors and lifts. The
configuration can be set up before the actual hardware is in place (logical controllers). 500
series controller connections can be 'probed' to locate the physical controllers.
Click here for more information on logical and physical controllers
To improve the configuration and installation process of an Administration Software system
there is the concept of logical and physical controllers in the system.
A logical controller enables the configuration of an Administration Software system without the
need for any physical hardware and enables the areas, access groups, etc. to be configured
offsite without having hardware present.
A physical controller handles the physical connection between the communications engine and
the controller hardware and these are created during the probe from the Hardware module.
Once the physical controllers have been located, the logical controller configurations can be
dropped onto the physical controllers to link the required configuration to the physical controller.
Likewise should a physical controller need replacing due a hardware failure then the
configuration can be simply moved to the new controller.
If there is more than one channel defined:
1. When a probe is requested, the Select
Channels window is displayed.
2. Select the channels to be probed. All
channels can be selected using the Select
All button. All channels can be deselected
by selecting the Clear All button.
3. Select the OK button to start the probe or
the Cancel window to cancel the request.
An example of how controllers can be
physically connected is given in the Hardware
Configuration section.
As well as a tree view of channels and controllers, the following controller information can be
displayed using the normal list view facilities to manipulate the columns (see the List View
section).
Name The name of the controller.
Description The description of the controller.
Type The type of controller (e.g. 512).
#Doors The number of doors allowed for this type of controller.
Base Door# The number of the first door on the controller based on its order on the
channel.
Loaded An indication that the controller has a valid database.
Online An indication of whether controller is online (True) or offline (False).
Comms OK An indication that the PC is communicating with the controller (True)
or not (False).
Loading An indication that the controller is being loaded with the database.
Firmware Version The current firmware in the controller.

Serial Number The serial number of the controller.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 83
Administration Software
In addition to the normal list view facilities (see the List View section), the following facilities are
also available:
To contract an expanded tree view:
• Select the icon.
To copy or delete a channel:
• Right click the channel in the tree view and select Copy or Delete.
To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:
• Click here.
To access 500 TCP/IP channel facilities:
1. Right click the channel in the tree view.
2. The following facilities are then available:
• Reset the server password by selecting Reset Password. The password must also be
reset at the 500 (see the Manage Controller Firmware section).
• Download the channel database to all controllers on the channel by selecting
Download channel database.
• Synchronise all controller clocks on the channel by selecting Synchronise all
controller clocks.
• Manage controller firmware by selecting Firmware Download.
To access direct channel facilities:
1. Right click the channel in the tree view.
2. The following facilities are then available:
• Initialise the CNC by selecting Initialise CNC ( 1100/2100/2200 CNC channel only).
• Download the channel database to all controllers on the channel by selecting Download
channel database.
• Abort a channel download by selecting Abort channel download ( 1100/2100/2200
channel only).
• Synchronise all controller clocks by selecting Synchronise all controller clocks.
• Disconnect the channel by selecting Disconnect the channel.
To access dialup channel facilities:
1. Right click the channel in the tree view.
2. The following facilities are then available:
• Display the Dialup Connection window by selecting Dial Now, Show Call Progress or
Hang Up.
• Reset the password by selecting Reset Password. The password must also be reset at
the controller (see the Modems section).
• Download the channel database to all controllers on the channel by selecting Download
channel database.
• Synchronise all controller clocks by selecting Synchronise all controller clocks.
To access offline channel facilities:
1. Right click the channel in the tree view.
2. The following facilities are then available:
• Reset the password by selecting Reset Password. The password must also be reset at

the controller (see the Reset Password section).
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 84
Administration Software
• Download the channel database to a PC or PDA by selecting Download to PC or
Download to PDA (see the Download to the Controllers using a PC and Download
to the Controllers using a PDA sections).
See also List View section.

4.14.2 Channel Property Page
4.14.2.1 Channel Details
The Channel Property Page is used to define channels . The configuration information is
displayed on initial selection.
To display channel details information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a channel in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 85
Administration Software
The following can then be specified:
Name The name of the channel (specified by data entry).
Channel Type The type of channel (selected from drop-down list).
Protocol Type The type of protocol (selected from drop-down list).
Computer Name The name of the computer in a multi-PC system (selected from dropdown
list).
Communications Port The number of the communications port on the PC (selected from
1
drop-down list).
Note
If a communications port is configured for a modem, it will not be
displayed for selection even if the modem is not connected.
500 URL 2 The Universal Resource Locator (i.e. http://address) of the server
(specified by data entry or selecting the 500 Probe button).
IP Address 3 The IP address of the 512IP or 2200IP connected to a Ethernet
(specified by data entry or selecting the IP Address Probe button). It
is recommended to use a static IP address specified as described in
the Configure Device IP Addresses section.
Online The channel can be taken online/offline (specified by check box).
1 Direct channel only
2 500 TCP/IP channel only
3
Direct TCP/IP channel only
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To perform channel tasks:
• Select Tasks. The following options are then available:
Reset Password - Resets the 500 or offline channel password ( 500 or offline channel
only, see Reset Password section).
Dial Now, Show Call Progress or Hang Up - Displays the Dialup Connection window
to dialup a modem (dialup channel only, see the Modems section).
Download channel database - Downloads to the selected channel.
Abort download 1 - Aborts the download. Only applicable during a download.
Synchronise controller time- Synchronises the time on all controllers with the PC.
Firmware download - Downloads the added firmware to the selected server ( 500
channel only, see the Manage Controller Firmware section).

Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.
To add/update/delete channels:
Click here.
4.14.2.2 Channel Areas
This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a 500 TCP/IP channel.
To display areas information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a 500 TCP/IP channel in the List
View.
3. Select the Areas tab.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 86
Administration Software
The following are then displayed:
Areas A list of areas that can be assigned to the 500 (selected by
check boxes).
Note
The default area (i.e. Outside) cannot be assigned to a 500.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete channels:
Click here.
4.14.2.3 Channel 500
This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a 500 TCP/IP channel.
To display 500 information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a 500 TCP/IP channel in the List
View.
3. Select the 500 tab.
The following are then displayed but can not be modified:
Loaded An indication that the server has a valid database.
Loading An indication that the server is being downloaded.
Board Identity The name allocated to the printed circuit board.
Board Version The version number of the printed circuit board.
Firmware Type The type of firmware in the server. Different types may
provide different features.
Firmware Version The version firmware that has been added.
Board Support Package
Version
The version of WinCe build.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To suppress/unsuppress asynchronous events:
• Select/deselect the Suppress async events check box.
To use unencrypted/encrypted communications:
• Select/deselect the Use unencrypted communications check box.
To add/update/delete channels:
• Click here.
To specify the override as a 2-state or 4-state input:
• Select the Override is 2-state or Override is 4-state radio button.
4.14.2.4 Channel Alarm Management
To display alarm management information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a channel in the List View.
3. Select the Alarm Management tab.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 87
Administration Software
The following can then be specified:
Alarm Area The alarm area that should be armed if the server is to be
armed (specified by drop-down list).
If none is specified, the server cannot be armed.
Omit Permitted An indication of whether to allow alarms associated with this
channel to be omitted from arming (specified by check box).
Silent Alarm An indication of whether the alarms associated with this
channel are silent (specified by check box).
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete controllers:
Click here.
4.14.2.5 Channel Settings
This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a direct channel.
To display settings information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a channel in the List View.
3. Select the Settings tab.
The following can then be specified:
Line Speed 1
The baud rate of the channel (selected from drop-down list).
1
Direct and Dialup channels only

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 88
Administration Software
The following are displayed but cannot be modified:
Timeout The time in milli-seconds before a communication attempt is
cancelled because communication has not been established.
Retry Count The number of communication attempts to try before
abandoning the communication.
Poll Interval The time in milli-seconds between polling for communications
on the line.
Polls in Slow Poll The number of polls in the poll interval after a communications
failure.
4.14.2.6 Channel Dialup
This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a dialup channel.
To display dialup information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a dialup channel in the List View.
3. Select the Dialup tab.
The following can then be specified:
Phone Number The telephone number of the modem connected to the
server/controller (specified by data entry).
Connect Timeout (mins) The timeout in minutes to terminate the connection if there are
no updates to the controller.
Dialup Schedule If the check box is selected, the next dialup and dialup interval
can be specified.
Next schedule dialup at The date and time for the next dialup (specified by data entry or
drop-down calendar and time). If the date specified is in the
past, a dialup is performed when Update is selected and the
next dialup calculated from the dialup interval.
Dialup interval The time between successive dialups.
Use any available modem Any available modem connected to the PC can be used by
selecting the radio button.
Use the following modems A list of modems connected to the PC. Modems to use can be
specified by selecting the radio button and then the modem
check box(es) from the list.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete channels:
Click here.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 89
Administration Software
4.14.2.7 Channel Dialback
Notes
1. Dialback is only applicable to the controller the modem is connected to.
2. For a 1100/2100/2200 dialup channel, a master controller must be configured before
this tab is displayed.
To display dialback information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a dialup channel in the List View.
3. Select the Dialback tab.
The following can then be specified:
Enable Dialback Dialback is enabled by selecting the radio button. If enabled, a
dialback is initiated by events at the server/controller.
Primary Modem The name of the primary modem connected to the PC (selected
from a drop-down list). The modem must be configured, see the
Modems section.
Secondary Modem The name of the secondary modem connected to the PC. The
secondary modem is used if the primary modem is unavailable
(selected from a drop-down list).The modem must be
configured, see the Modems section.
Threshold (percent) The percentage events in the event buffer required to initiate a
dialback to the PC (specified by data entry or by increments).
PC Site Number 1 The PC site number (range 2 to 128) that is unique on each PC
and identifies the channel’s site (selected from a drop-down
list). Sites 2 to 33 can support up to 8 controllers (1 master and
7 slaves). Sites 34 to 128 support 1 controller (each one a
master).
Note
Site 1 is reserved for direct six wire bus channels.
1
1100/2100/2200 only.
Dialback Events A list of events that will initiate a dialback (selected by check
boxes).
Keep Line Alive 2 If using a GSM modem on the controller with a 'Pay as You Go'
SIM card that requires at least one outward call in a specified
interval (e.g. every 180 days), the line can be kept alive by
specifying a periodic dialback.
Notes
1. The system will make a call between 00:00 and 00:10 hours
on the appropriate day and the call must be answered and
kept connected for at least 1 minute.
2. Periodically check your credit by phoning the customer
services department of your service provider and top up if
necessary.
2
512 only

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 90
Administration Software
Phone Number If this radio button is selected, the phone number for periodic
dialback is specified by data entry.
If your service provider allows, it is recommended to dial the
speaking clock (123) and the call will automatically disconnect
after 1 minute. If not dialling the speaking clock, ensure that
each channel dials back on a different day or to a different
number.
Dialback to PC If this radio button is selected, periodic dialback is to a modem
connected to the administration PC.
Interval (in days) The interval for periodic dialback specified by data entry or
increments. Consult your service provider to determine the call
frequency required. Always ensure a call is made a few days
before the expiry time to allow for service failures.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete channels:
Click here.
4.14.2.8 Channel Layout
To display layout information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a channel in the List View.
3. Select the Layout tab.
The layout displays a list of controllers
associated with the channel.
To display a list of controllers associated with a server:
A firmware download will reset the keep line alive interval
counter to 0.
• Select the sign next to the server.
To display a list of doors associated with an access controller:
• Select the sign next to the access controller.
To display a list of readers associated with a door:
• Select the sign next to the door.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete channels:
Click here.
4.14.2.9 Add/Update/Delete a Channel
• Select the Hardware module.
To add a channel:
1. Select New and Create New Channel or Create New 500.
2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information (select a property page field and

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 91
Administration Software
press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Add.
4. Wait for the communications to be established before probing for controllers.
To update an channel:
1. Select a channel.
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
To delete an channel:
1. Select an channel.
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the channel.

4.14.3 Controller Property Page
4.14.3.1 Controller Details
The Controller Property Page is used to define door controllers (e.g. controller type and
address). The controller details are displayed on initial selection.
To display details information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 92
Administration Software
The following can then be specified:
Name The name of the controller.
Description A description of the controller.
4-State Override An indication of whether 4-state monitoring of the controller override is
used (specified by checkbox).
Type The type of controller (selected from a drop-down list).
Channel 1 The channel associated with the controller (automatically entered).
500 2 The 500 associated with the controller (selected from a drop-down
list). Select ' None' if the controller is not on a 500 channel.
Lock Sharing (n and
m) 3
An indication of whether the lock is controlled by an in and out reader
on door channels n and m (specified by check box). This should only
be used with 1100/2100 Series Door Controllers or Wiegand in
and out readers.
Online 4 The controller can be taken online/offline (specified by check box).
1 Only if the controller has been assigned to a channel.
2 Only if the controller has not been assigned to a channel
3 Not input/output controllers
4
Only for connected controllers
To perform controller tasks:
• Select Tasks.
• The following options are available for an online controller:
Configure controller or Unconfigure controller - Displays the Configure Controller or
Unconfigure Controller window.
Download controller data - Downloads to the selected controller.
Abort download 1 - Aborts the download. Only applicable during a download.
Synchronise controller time- Synchronises the time on all controllers with the PC.
Set Modem Initialization String - Displays the Modem Initialization String window.
Firmware download - Downloads the added firmware to the selected controller (see the
Manage Controller Firmware section).
Reset diagnostic code – Resets the diagnostic code.

Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 93
Administration Software
• The following options are available for an offline controller:
Identify Controller - Displays status information for the controller currently connected.
Connect to Controller - Connects the controller to the PC – this option will be grayed
out until the Identify Controller steps have been completed.
Whilst connected a further set of options becomes available under the tasks menu:
Download controller database - Downloads the database to the selected controller.
Firmware download - Downloads the added firmware to the selected controller (see the
Manage Controller Firmware section).
Only download firmware to one controller at a time.
Reset diagnostic code - Resets the diagnostic code (link to glossary).
Disconnect from Controller – Disconnects the controller from the PC.
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete controllers:
• Click here.
To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:
• Click here.
4.14.3.2 Controller Information
This tab is only displayed if the selected controller has been probed.
To display controller information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. Select the Controller tab.
The following are then displayed but can not be modified:
Serial Number The serial number of the controller.
Firmware ID The firmware identity of the controller.
Firmware Version The current firmware in the controller.
Firmware Type The type of firmware in the controller. Different types may
provide different features.
Board Revision The revision number of the printed circuit board of the
controller.
Power Status The status of the controller's power supply.
Battery Status The status of the controller's battery.
Backup Battery Status The status of the controller's backup battery.
Battery Level The charge on the controller's battery.
Diagnostic Code The diagnostic code of the controller.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete controllers:
Click here.
To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:
Click here.
4.14.3.3 Controller 2100/2200
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 94
Administration Software
This tab is only displayed if the selected controller is a 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controller.
To display 1100/2100/2200 information:
4. Select the Hardware module.
5. Select a 1100/2100/2200 controller in the
List View.
6. Select the 2100/2200 tab.
The following can then be specified:
[ 1
1100/2100/2200 - RS232 -SWB protocol only] [ 2
2200s only]
Master 1 An indication of whether the door controller is a master
controller (specified by radio button).
Slave 1 An indication of whether the door controller is a slave
controller (specified by radio button).
Slave Address The address of the slave controller is selected by data entry
or increment.
For 1100/2100/2200 - RS232 - SWB protocol, the address of
the master controller is always 1 and is automatically
allocated if the Master radio switch is selected,. The slave
address range is 2 to 8.
For 1100/2100/2200 - RS232 -SWB - CNC protocol, the
CNC is the master controller. The slave address range is 1
to 32.
Master Override Input 2 An indication of whether a override condition on the master
(e.g. fire alarm) unlocks all the doors on the slave controller
(specified by check box).
This option is only available for 2200 master and slave
controllers. When it is selected, an override condition on the
master controller causes the doors on the master and all
configured slave controllers to unlock. The slave controllers
must also have this option selected.
This feature is not suitable for safety critical systems
which should use a hard wiring solution by daisy chaining
the controller override inputs together.
Anti-passback n and m An indication of whether anti-passback is enabled on the
door channels n and m (specified by check box).
Also apply to exit An indication of whether the anti-passback also applies to
the Exit readers of the door channels (specified by check
box).
Anti-passback timeout The timeout period (in minutes) when an anti-passback
violation is cancelled (specified by data entry or by
increments).

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete controllers:
Click here.
To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:
Click here.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 95
Administration Software

4.14.3.4 Controller Doors
This tab is only displayed if the selected controller is an access or door controller.
To display doors information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. Select the Doors tab.
The Doors tab displays a list of doors
associated with the controller.
To display a list of readers associated with
a door:
• Select the sign next to the door.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete controllers:
• Click here.
To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:
• Click here.
4.14.3.5 Controller Inputs
To display input configuration information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. Select the Inputs tab.
4. If necessary, select the Input
Configuration tab.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 96
Administration Software
The following can then be specified:
List A list of inputs associated with the controller (automatically
entered). An input can be defined by selecting a check box
or check boxes.
If a 1100/2100/2200 controller is selected, the list is a tree
view that can be expanded to list the inputs on any Alarm
Event Managers connected to the controller.
Name of Input n The name of the selected input (specified by data entry).
Description The description of the selected input (specified by data
entry).
Input Type 1
The type of the selected input (specified by drop-down list).
1
500 Series Controller only
2
Note
AEM input types must be set using the switch bank and
jumper on the AEM.
Disarm Time Profile 3 The time profile that disarms the input (specified by dropdown
list).
If specified, no alarms or events are generated during the
time profile.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 97
Administration Software
Input Mode The mode of the selected input (specified by drop-down
list). 4
Pulse Count 1
Pulse Count Time 1
Debounce Time 1
The number of triggers that need to occur before an alarm is
generated for the selected input (specified by data entry or
increments).
The time in seconds that the pulse count operates for the
selected input (specified by drop-down list).
Count is reset when time expires and starts from last
activation.
The time in milliseconds that the selected input must be in a
state before that state is registered (specified by drop-down
list).
Debounce times is important for proper use of pressure
switches, strain gauges and other sensors that are “bouncy”.
Debouncing is also important for resistance to ac induction
on long cable runs. 5
Do not set a time that will override the pulse count.
Note
When specifying a debounce time, the input signal
must be in a stable state for at least 200mS after the
end of the debounce time before it is recognised.
Configured from Template A template of input conditions to aid specification (selected
for a drop-down list). The template specifies the input
configuration and alarm properties. 6
1 500 Series Controllers only
2 Input Types
Type State 512 Event 1100/2100/2200 Series Event
NO Open input normal sensor open
Closed input active sensor closed
NC Open input active sensor open
Closed input normal sensor closed
3 State NO Open input normal N/A
Closed input active N/A
Cut input open tamper N/A
3 State NC Open input active N/A
Closed input normal N/A
Short input short tamper N/A
4 State NO Open input normal sensor open
Closed input active sensor closed
Cut input open tamper circuit cut
Short input short tamper circuit shorted
4 State NC Closed input normal sensor closed
Open input active sensor open
Cut input open tamper circuit cut

Short input short tamper circuit shorted
3 1100/2100/2200 Controllers only
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 98
Administration Software
4
Input Modes
24-Hour Alarm If the input enters an active or tamper alarm state, an alarm message will
be displayed in the Alarm Viewer and Event Log. Input inactive events only appear in the Event
Log.
24-Hour Information If the input enters a tamper alarm state, an alarm message will be
displayed in the Alarm Viewer and Event Log. Input active events and input inactive events only
appear in the Event Log.
Controlled Alarm If the input enters an active or tamper alarm state, an alarm message will
be displayed in the Alarm Viewer only if the area is armed. Note that input tamper alarm
messages also displayed in the Alarm Viewer when the area is not armed.
Lift - An input that allows a lift button selection to be monitored.
5 Examples
Input Function Debounce Time/mS
Request-to-exit 200
Break-glass,
DC Override,
Alarm Zone
500
Door Contact, Latch Contact >1s
6
Input Templates
Template Input Type Input Mode Pulse Count
and Time
24-Hour
Visible Panic
24-Hour
Invisible
Panic
24-Hour
Burglary
24-Hour
Information
Controlled
Interior
Controlled
Exterior
4 State N0 24-Hour
Alarm
4 State N0 24-Hour
Alarm
4 State N0 24-Hour
Alarm
4 State N0 24-Hour
Alarm
4 State N0 Controlled
Alarm
4 State N0 Controlled
Alarm
Debounce
Time
200ms
3; 5s 200ms
Lift NO Lift 200ms
To display alarm properties information:
• Select the Alarm Properties tab on the
Controller Inputs page.
Alarm
Properties
200ms Silent Alarm
200ms Silent alarm
200ms Omit permitted
3; 5s 200ms Omit permitted

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 99
Administration Software
The following can then be specified:
List A list of inputs associated with the controller (automatically
entered). A single input or several inputs can be specified
by selected a check box or check boxes.
Alarm Area The alarm area that should be armed if the controller is to
be armed (specified by drop-down list).
If none is specified, the controller cannot be armed.
Omit permitted An indication of whether to allow alarms associated with
this input can be omitted from arming (specified by check
box).
Silent Alarm An indication of whether the alarms associated with this
input are silent (specified by check box).
Configured from Template A template of input conditions to aid specification (selected
from a drop-down list). The template specifies the input
configuration and alarm properties. 5
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete controllers:
Click here.
To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:
Click here.
4.14.3.6 Controller Outputs
To display output configuration information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Outputs tab.
4. If necessary, select the Output
Configuration tab.
The following can then be specified:
List A list of outputs associated with the controller (automatically
entered). An output can be specified by selected a check
box or check boxes.
If a 1100/2100/2200 controller is selected, the list is a tree
view that can be expanded to list the outputs on the
controller and on any Alarm Event Managers connected to
the controller.
Name of Output n The name of the selected output (specified by data entry).
Description The description of the selected output (specified by data
entry).
Time Profile The time profile to apply to the output (specified by dropdown
list).
Output Type The type of the selected output (specified by drop-down list).
1 Link to output types
Momentary Time 2 The time that the selected output will be on (specified by
drop-down list).

Delay Before Activation (secs)
3
Maximum Activation Time
(min) 4
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 100
2 Momentary outputs only
Administration Software
The time delay before the output activates; 0 means no
delay (selected by check box and specified by drop-down list
if the Delay Before Activation checkbox is selected).
3 1100/2100/2200 only
The time in minutes before the selected output will be
automatically turned off; 0 means no maximum activation
time (selected by check box and specified by drop-down list
if the Maximum Activation Time checkbox is selected).
4
Latched outputs only
Cycle Time (s) 5 The total time in seconds for the pulse to cycle on/off
(specified by data entry or increments).
5
Pulsed outputs only
Active (%) 5 The period of cycle the selected output is on as % of cycle
time (specified by data entry or increments).
4
Pulsed outputs only
Number of Pulses 5 The maximum number of pulses of the selected output
(specified by data entry or increments if the Number of
Pulses checkbox is selected).
Configured from Template
To display output details information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Outputs tab.
4. If necessary, select the Details tab.
5 Pulsed outputs only
A template of output conditions to aid specification (selected
from a drop-down list). The template specifies the output
configuration. 6
6
Link to output templates
The following can then be specified:
Relay Rating The relay rating on the relay on the selected controller
(automatically entered).
Assigned to Area The area associated with the output (selected from a dropdown
list).
Area Sounders If the radio button is selected, the output will activate a
sounder for the specified area.
Note
Area sounder should not be used with a toggle output as the
output is automatically reset when the alarm is
acknowledged and/or restored (see the Area Alarm
Management section).
Alarm Sensors Reset If the radio button is selected, the output will reset an input
that is in alarm, i.e. an Area Reset command from the Alarm
Viewer will clear the alarm condition.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 101
Administration Software
Manual If the radio button is selected, the output is activated
manually.
Note
The output cab be placed on an Alarm Map and then
manually controlled from the Alarm Viewer.
Local Area Alarm If the radio button is selected, the output is activated if the
area is armed.
To specify output activation information:
This tab is only displayed for 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers.
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Outputs tab.
4. If necessary, select the Output
Activation tab.
5. Select the Add button to add an output
activation condition.
6. Repeat Step 5 for each output activation
condition required (e.g. if the output is to
be activated when an input active or door
left open alarm is detected, two output
activation conditions must be specified).
7. If necessary, select an output activation
condition and the Delete button to delete
it.
The following can be specified for each output activation condition:
Name The name of the output condition (specified by data entry).
When condition The event that will trigger the output activation (selected from
a drop-down list).
Note
If PIN Reader Duress is selected, a maximum activation time
for the relay output must be specified to switch off the output.
PIN Reader Duress allows a keyholder access if the PIN+1
is entered (e.g. 1235 is entered for 1234) but generates a
silent alarm indicating that the keyholder is being threatened.
The PIN+1 only affects only the last digit (e.g. the duress
number for 6789 is 6780 not 6790).
The duress facility is not implemented in PIN only
mode.
Source Name The name of the item that may generate the event (selected
from a drop-down list).
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete controllers:
Click here.
To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:
Click here.

Output Types
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 102
Administration Software
Latched The output will stay on until turned off (e.g. by event to action) or the maximum
activation time expires.
Momentary The output will stay on until the momentary time expires.
Toggle The output will toggle its state each time it is activated (i.e. if the output is on the next
activation will switch it off, if the output is off the next activation will switch off).
Pulsed The output will pulse until turned off (e.g. by event to action) or the number of pulses
expires.
Output Templates
Template Output
Type
Internal
Sounder
Sensor
Reset
Momentary
Time
Cycle Time Active
Pulsed 2s 50%
Momentary 3s
4.14.3.7 Controller Alarm Management
To display alarm management information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. Select the Alarm Management tab.
The following can then be specified:
Alarm Area The alarm area that should be armed if the server is to be
armed (specified by drop-down list).
If none is specified, the server cannot be armed.
Omit Permitted An indication of whether to allow alarms associated with this
controller to be omitted from arming (specified by check
box).
Silent Alarm An indication of whether the alarms associated with this
controller are silent (specified by check box).
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete controllers:
Click here.
4.14.3.8 Add/Update/Delete a Controller
• Select the Hardware module.
To add a controller:
1. Select New and Create New Controller or press Alt-NC.
2. Enter the controller details and select each tab in turn to check the other information (select
a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Add.
4. Probe and configure the controller.

5. Download the database to the controller :
• Select the Details tab.
• Select the Tasks button.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 103
Administration Software
• Select Download controller database.
To update a controller:
1. Select a controller.
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
4. Download the new database to the controller :
• Select the Details tab.
• Select the Tasks button.
• Select Download controller database.
To delete a controller:
1. Select an controller.
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the controller.
Note
Deleting a controller deletes its associated doors.
4.14.3.9 Probe/Configure/Unconfigure Controllers
• Select the Hardware module.
To probe the controller configuration:
1. Ensure that the channels are correctly specified.
2. Select Probe Channels icon or Controller > Probe Channels. If there is more than one
channel, the Select Channels window is displayed. Select the channels to be probed and
the OK button.
The physical connections are probed and the software configured.
The controller barcode allocation table provided with the controller and in the Reports tab
should be used to aid configuration.
To configure a controller to a channel:
1. Drag and drop the selected controller on
to one of the connected controllers
indicated by the serial number.
Alternatively, right click a controller serial
number, select Configure Controller from
the drop-down list, enter the controller
name and select OK. The Configure
Controller window is displayed.
2. Select the option to download to the
controller and OK. If this option is not
selected, a download can be performed
later by selecting the controller and Tasks
(see the Controller Details section).
To unconfigure a controller from a channel:
• Right click the channel serial number and select Unconfigure Controller from the dropdown
list.

4.14.3.10 Online Controller Tasks
To perform controller tasks on a configured controller, see the Controller Details section.
To perform controller tasks on a probed but unconfigured controller:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select an unconfigured controller and the
Unconfigured Controller window is
displayed.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 104
Administration Software
The following are then displayed but can not be modified:
Serial Number The serial number of the controller.
Firmware Version The current firmware in the controller.
Firmware Type The type of firmware in the controller. Different types may
provide different features.
Board Revision The revision number of the printed circuit board of the
controller.
• Select Tasks. The following options are then available:
Download controller data - Downloads to the selected controller.
Synchronise controller time- Synchronises the time on all controllers with the PC.
Firmware download - Downloads the added firmware to the selected controller (see the
Manage Controller Firmware section).
Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.

4.14.4 Offline Channel and Controller Tasks
4.14.4.1 Download Database to the Controllers using the PC
A connected controller is automatically disconnected if an update is performed or a
different module is displayed. Therefore the following procedure from Step 1 (or Step 9 if
already identified and configured) is required after any updates.
1. Physically connect an offline controller to
the PC (this controller is then the gateway
controller).
2. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.
3. Select the gateway controller.
4. Select the Tasks button.
5. Select the Identify Controller button and
the Identify/Configure Controller window
is displayed.
6. Select the COM port the gateway
controller is connected to and the Identify
button and the window is populated with
the controller details.
7. Select the Configure button and the
Configure Controller window is
displayed.
8. Select OK to configure the controller or
Cancel to return to the Identify/Configure
Controller window.
9. Select the Tasks button and the Connect
to Controller option and the Connect
Controller window is displayed.
10. Select the COM port the gateway
controller is connected to.
11. Select the Connect button and select OK
on the Successfully Connected to
controller window and the Controller
Synchronisation Command window is
displayed.
12. When the event collection process is
100% complete, select OK and the
controller will be available for download.
13. Select the Tasks button and the
Download controller database option.
14. When the download process is 100%
complete, select OK and the controller
can be physically disconnected from the
PC.
The controller can be left connected and
any events will be displayed in the event
log.
15. Select the Tasks button and the
Disconnect from controller option.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 105
Administration Software

4.14.4.2 Download Database to the Controllers using the PDA
1. Physically connect the PC to a PDA via an
RS-232 channel.
2. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.
3. Select Hardware > Download offline
channels and the Offline
synchronization required window is
displayed.
4. Select the channel to download to and
select Next.
5. When the download process is 100%
complete, select OK and the PDA can be
physically disconnected.
6. Physically connect the PDA to the an
offline controller (this controller is then the
gateway controller) and use the PDA
facilities to download the database to the
controllers.
4.14.4.3 Upload Database from PDA to a PC
1. Select the Hardware module in the Explorer bar.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 106
Administration Software
2. Physically connect the PDA to the PC via an RS-232 or USB port (using the cable provided
with the PDA) and the upload will start automatically.

4.14.5 Lift Property Page
4.14.5.1 Lift Details
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 107
Administration Software
The Lift Property Page is used to define lift readers. A lift reader is a multi-access reader that
can be used to control access to one or more areas (e.g. floors or lockers). When used in a lift,
a valid key would allow access to specific floors by enabling appropriate lift buttons. Each floor
of the lift is configured as an area controlled by the same 500 as the controller the lift reader is
connected to.
To display details information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Expand the Connected Controllers list in
the List View.
3. Select a lift reader.
4. If necessary, select the Details tab.
The following can then be specified:
Name The name of the lift (specified by data entry).
500 The 500 controlling the lift (selected from a drop-down list).
Reader The name of the lift reader (selected from a drop-down list). Lift
readers must be specified first, see the Add/Update/Delete a Lift
Reader section). The reader activates the appropriate destinations
outputs when a keyholder presents a key to the reader. Normally the
destination outputs are connected to lift floor buttons that are enabled
when a valid key is presented to the reader located inside the lift.
Selection Time The time (in seconds) a lift button remains selectable (selected by
data entry or increments).
Extra Selection Time The extra time (in seconds) a lift button remains selectable if the
keyholder requires extra door time (specified by data entry or by
increments). The Requires Extra Door Time check box must be
enabled for the keyholder (see the Keyholder Details section).
To add/update/delete a lift reader:
• Click here.
4.14.5.2 Lift Destinations
To display configuration information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Expand the Connected Controllers list in
the List View.
3. Select a lift reader.
4. If necessary, select the Destinations tab.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 108
Administration Software
The following can then be specified:
Area A list of areas (floors) each associated destination output (e.g.
connected to a lift button) gives access to (added using the Add New
button and selected from a drop-down list).
Output A list of destination outputs used to activate each lift button (selected
from a drop-down list).
Input A list of inputs (optional) that allows a lift button selection to be
monitored (selected from a drop-down list). This is necessary to use
the area usage facility.
Out of Hours Exit An indication of whether out of hours exit is allowed (selected by
check box).
To add an area (floor):
• Select the Add New button.
To add/update/delete a lift reader:
• Click here.
4.14.5.3 Lift Access
This tab is accessed via the Door module. Door details, door configuration and door alarm
management for door channels that have lift readers are defined in the same way as ordinary
door channels.
To display access information:
1. Select the Door module.
2. Select a door channel that has lift readers
in the List View .
3. If necessary, select the Access tab.
The following can then be specified:
Reader Type The type of reader(s) connected to the lift (selected from a drop-down
list).
SIG A / SIG B One of the door channels can be used for door access. The lift access
specified on the Lift Destinations tab.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete a lift reader:
• Click here.

4.14.6 Add/Update/Delete a Lift Reader
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 109
Administration Software
The appropriate 500, controllers, areas (floors), time profiles, inputs and outputs must be
created first. All the controllers providing readers, outputs and inputs must be connected to the
same 500. All the areas must be assigned to the same 500 and cannot have anti-passback or
airlock properties. Inputs can be assigned for monitoring and/or area usage.
The readers, inputs and outputs associated with a lift are assigned by the lift reader
configuration.
To add a lift reader:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select New and Create New Lift.
5. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information (select a property page field and
press F1 to obtain help).
6. Select Add.
To add lift inputs and outputs:
1. Select a controller in the List View,
2. Select the Inputs tab and specify each relevant input as a lift input (i.e. 2-state normally
open).
3. Select the Outputs tab and specify each relevant output as a lift output (i.e. Latched with
no maximum activation time).
4. Select the Update button.
To update a lift reader:
1. Select the Door module.
2. Select a door channel with a lift reader.
3. Select each tab in turn and enter/update appropriate information (select a property page
field and press F1 to obtain help).
4. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
To delete a lift reader:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Expand the Connected Controllers list in the List View.
3. Select a lift reader.
4. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.
5. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the lift reader.

4.15 Doors
4.15.1 Door List View
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 110
Administration Software
The Door List View displays a list of doors. A door is used to access an area and is configured
by defining the readers that allow/disallow access into that area (e.g. a door can be defined by
an in and out reader).
See List View section.
4.15.2 Door Property Page
4.15.2.1 Door Details
The Door Property Page is used to define doors (e.g. lock behaviour and time profile). The
door details are displayed on initial selection.
To display details information:
1. Select the Doors module.
2. Select a door in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
The following can then be specified:
Name The name of the door (specified by data entry).
Description A description of the door (specified by data entry).
Door Profile A time/mode profile that determines when the door is unlocked or
when the door is in particular mode, e.g. anti-passback in operation
(selected from a drop-down list).
Door Status 1 The Use Count ( the number of access granted events since a Reset
Use Count) and Door Mode (controlled by a time/mode profile or
Tasks button).
1
512 only
To perform door tasks:
1. Select Tasks. The following options are then available. For Offline channels, these tasks
are only available when connected to the controller:
Secure Door – this will lock the door if the door is unlocked (e.g. on a time profile)
Unlock Door –this will unlock the door indefinitely or for a specified time.
Bolt Door – this has different functions for door types, click here for further information.
(link to glossary)
Normal Door Operation – this returns the door to normal operation (e.g. locked or
unlocked on a time profile).
Set Mode 1 – this applies a specified door mode profile.
Unlock Once 1 – this unlocks the door for the lock release time.
Issue Request to Exit - this unlocks the door for the lock release time.
Reset Use Count 1 - this reset the use count to zero.
1 512 only

2. If Unlock Door is selected, the Unlock
Door window is displayed. Select the
Unlock door indefinitely or Length of
time to unlock door radio button and
specify the length of time (max. 255
minutes). Then select the OK button
3. If Set Mode is selected, the Door Mode
Settings window is displayed. The
Security Mode displays the current mode
and can be altered by selecting the
required Security Mode from a dropdown
list and the length of time it will be
applied. For each direction, select the
Access Mode and whether Two Card
Access is required. Then select the OK
button
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To update doors:
Click here.
Note
To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (see
Controller Details section).
4.15.2.2 Door Access
Two readers (in and out) can be attached to each door. Alternatively, one reader and one
Request to Exit switch can be used.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 111
Administration Software
If the controller controls a lift reader, see the Lift Access section.
If the controller controls a muster reader, see the Muster and Evacuation section.
Note
1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers only allow one reader per door channel and all
controllers only allow one Wiegand or Magstripe reader per door channel. Therefore, if
using 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers, Wiegand or Magstripe readers, lock
sharing must be enabled for in and out readers (see Controller Details section).
To display access information:
1. Select the Door module.
2. Select a door in the List View.
3. Select the Access tab.
The Access tab displays the door channel for the selected door. If a 1100/2100 door with lock sharing
is selected, the two door channels associated with the door are displayed. The format of the display
depends on the access type and reader type. If the reader type is defined as Wiegand, only one
Wiegand reader per door channel can be defined.

The following can then be specified:
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 112
Administration Software
[ 1 1100/2100/2200 only, 2 Access by Areas mode only; 3 Access by Doors mode only ;
4 512 only
Reader Type The type of reader(s) connected to the door (selected from a dropdown
list).
PIN Reader
Connected 1
An indication of whether a PIN reader is connected to the door.
Area 2 The area the reader gives access to (selected from a drop-down list).
Notes
1. If the door has an anti-passback door mode assigned, SIG A is the
Entry reader.
2. If the door also has lock sharing specified, door channel 1 is the
Entry reader.
Profile For 512, the reader mode profile to apply to the reader (selected from
a drop-down list).
For 1100/2100/2200, the time profile to apply to a PIN reader
(selected from a drop-down list). If a time profile is selected, a PIN is
not required during the time period only a valid token.
Mode profiles do not apply to the legacy Stanley PIN Reader.
The legacy Stanley PIN Reader is the only reader that can be used
with 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers.
Allow Access 3 An indication of whether access is allowed through this door to valid
keyholders (specified by radio button).
Reader connected 2 An indication of whether a reader is connected to this SIG line
(specified by radio button).
No reader connected An indication of whether a Request to Exit switch is connected to this
SIG line (specified by radio button).
Out of hours access An indication of whether out of hours access is allowed (selected by
check box).
Tamper Mode 4 An indication of whether reader tamper is disabled or enabled on the
door channel (selected from a drop-down list).
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To update doors:
Click here.
Note
To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (see
Controller Details section).
4.15.2.3 Door Configuration
To display configuration information:
1. Select the Door module.
2. Select a door in the List View.
3. Select the Configuration tab.

The following can then be specified:
[ 1 512 only; 2 1100/2100/2200 only]
3 EOL Door Inputs
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 113
Administration Software
Each door channel on the controller has an input (I/P), Request to Exit (RTE) and Door Contact
(DC) connections that can be used to supervise detectors. Four different input states can be
detected by fitting end-of-line resistors to the appropriate connector and 0V. These states are:

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 114
Administration Software
Input States
State Description Meaning
1 Switch open Reader tamper alarm
2 Switch closed Reader tamper alarm cleared
3 Short circuit Reader tamper line short
4 Wire cut Reader line cut
RTE States
State Description Meaning
1 Switch open Normal, no message
2 Switch closed Request to exit
3 Short circuit RTE line short
4 Wire cut RTE line cut
DC States
State Description Meaning
1 Switch open When door is locked will generate a door forced alarm
2 Switch closed A door forced alarm has been generated then cleared
3 Short circuit Door contact line short
4 Wire cut Door contact line cut
4 Door Configuration Modes
Field Selection Meaning
Door Normal Door contact, RTE mode.
Modes
RTE No Lock Lock not operated, PIR sensor.
Emergency Override Free exit, lock operated, Emergency override.
Auxiliary
Input
Modes
(512 only)
Auxiliary
Output
Mode
(512 only)
Emergency Override No
Lock
Free exit, no lock operated, Emergency override.
Not used I/P on controller's door channel not used.
Reader tamper I/P on the controller's door channel used for
reader tamper on Wiegand or Magstripe readers.
Bolt door I/P on the controller's door channel is used to bolt
the door when the input is active (i.e. access is
denied to all users except those with bolt door
privileges).
Note
A door that is usually open due to a time profile
will be bolted.
Emergency override I/P on the controller's door channel is used to
generate an emergency override and unlock the
door.
Latch contact I/P on the controller's door channel is used to
detect lock latching.
General input I/P on the controller's door channel is used for a
special-to-project purpose.
Not used The alarm output relay on the controller is not
used.
Door left open alarm 1 The output relay on the controller is activated if
the door has been left open.
Door forced alarm 1 The output relay on the controller is activated if
the door has been forced open.
Door forced/left open alarm 1 The output relay on the controller is activated if
the door has been forced open or left open.

Administration Software
Alarm shunt The output relay on the controller is activated for
the door release time if a valid access is
detected.
Time Profile The output relay on the controller is only used
during a specified time profile.
General Output The alarm output relay on the controller is used
for a special-to-project purpose.
1
Door monitoring must be enabled.
Controller The name of the controller that the controls the door
(automatically entered but can be changed via the Hardware
module (see Controller Details section).
Door Monitoring If the check box is selected, door monitoring is enabled. Door
contacts must be fitted.
Door Open Time The time (in seconds) the door is unlocked after a valid key has
been presented to the reader (specified by data entry or by
increments). Door contacts must be fitted.
Logging Mode 1 The type of transactions that will be logged in the event log
(selected from a drop-down list).
Key presentation - access-authorised events logged when key
presented.
Door opened - access-authorised events logged when door
opened after key presentation. If door not opened, user walked
away event is generated. A door contact must be fitted and door
monitoring set.
Lock Release Time The time (in seconds) allowed for the door to be unlocked after a
valid access (specified by data entry or by increments).
Extra Door Time 1 The extra time (in seconds) allowed if the keyholder requires
extra time to get through the door (specified by data entry or by
increments). The Requires Extra Door Time check box must be
enabled for the keyholder (see the Keyholder Details section).
Enable Lock Toggle 1 An indication of whether the door remains unlocked after a valid
key has been presented, or Request to Exit pressed, and only
locked when the key is presented again, or Request to Exit
pressed again (selected by check box).
Anti-Passback Timeout 2 The timeout period (in minutes) when an anti-passback violation
is cancelled (enabled by checkbox and specified by data entry or
by increments).
Note
If Timed Passback is enabled, this timeout also specifies the
duration of anti-passback.
Timed Passback 2 An indication of whether the timeout period for an anti-passback
violation is enabled (selected by check box).
Notes
1. Anti-passback is implemented on the Entry reader to an
area for the duration of the Anti-Passback Timeout. This
allows anti-passback to be assigned to a door with only
one reader (e.g. a Request to Exit switch is used to exit
the area).
2. If anti-passback is in operation on more than one door into
an area and Anti-Passback Timeout is set to different
times on each door, the longest Anti-Passback Timeout
timeout period will apply to all doors into the area.
EOL Door Inputs
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 115
1 An indication of whether the end-of-line inputs are used allowing
4 i i fRTE dd ( l db h k

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 116
Administration Software
4-state monitoring of RTE and door contact (selected by check
box). 3
Failsafe 4 An indication of whether the lock is fail-safe (selected by check
box). If the check box is not selected, the lock is fail-secure.
Alarm inhibit 4 INHB/DR3 on the controller's door channel is used to inhibit the
readers when the area is armed.
Door Contact Mode/RTE The type of Door Contact/Request to Exit connection (selected
Mode
from the Mode drop-down list). 5
Mode The type of door to reader connection (selected from a drop down
list). 5
1 512 only; 2 512 on direct channel only; 3 1100/2100/ 2200 only; 4 link to EOL Door Inputs ; 4 link
to Door Configuration Modes
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To update doors:
Click here.
Note
To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (see
Controller Details section).
4.15.2.4 Door Auxiliary IO
This tab is not displayed for 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers. Auxiliary IO for
1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers is specified as described in the Controller Outputs
section.
To display Auxiliary IO information:
1. Select the Door module.
2. Select a door in the List View.
3. Select the Auxiliary IO tab.
The following can then be specified:
Auxiliary Input Mode The use of the auxiliary input (selected from a drop-down list). 1
1
Link to definitions
Auxiliary Output Mode The use of the auxiliary output (selected from a drop-down list). 1
Time Profile The use of the auxiliary output (selected from a drop-down list). 1
Output Type The type of the selected output (specified by drop-down list). 1
Momentary Time 2 The time that the selected output will be on (specified by dropdown
list).
Maximum Activation Time
(min) 3
3 Momentary outputs only
The time in minutes before the selected output will be
automatically turned off; 0 means no maximum activation time
(selected by check box and specified by drop-down list if the
Maximum Activation Time checkbox is selected).
4 Latched outputs only
Cycle Time (s) 4 The total time in seconds for the pulse to cycle on/off (specified
by data entry or increments).

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 117
Administration Software
5
Pulsed outputs only
Active (%) 4 The period of cycle the selected output is on as % of cycle time
(specified by data entry or increments).
5
Pulsed outputs only
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To update doors:
Click here.
Note
To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (see
Controller Details section).
4.15.2.5 Door Alarm Management
To display alarms information:
1. Select the Door module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
3. Select the Alarms Management tab.
The following can then be specified:
Alarm Area The alarm area that should be armed if the door is to be armed
(specified by drop-down list).
If none is specified, the door cannot be armed.
Omit Permitted An indication of whether to allow alarms associated with this door
to be omitted from arming (specified by check box).
Silent Alarm An indication of whether the alarms associated with this door are
silent (specified by check box).
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To update doors:
Click here.
Note
To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (see
Controller Details section).

4.15.2.6 Door Security Level
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 118
Administration Software
This tab is only displayed in Access by Doors and Security Level mode (see Access Types
sections).
To display access information:
1. Select the Door module.
2. Select a door in the List View.
3. Select the Security Level tab.
The following can then be specified:
Default Security Level The security level required to open the door outside the time
profile (specified by data entry or by increments).
Timed Security Level The security level required to open the door during the time
profile (specified by data entry or by increments).
Time Profile The time profile allocated to the door (specified by a drop-down
list).
Note
A security level of 0 prevents the door being opened at any time by any key.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To update doors:
Click here.
Note
To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (see
Controller Details section).
4.15.3 Add/Update/Delete a Door
The appropriate areas, time profiles, controllers and channels must be created first.
• Select the Door module.
To add a door:
Doors are automatically created when a new controller is created.
To update a door
1. Select a door.
2. Select each tab in turn and enter/update appropriate information (select a property page
field and press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
To delete a door:
• Doors can only be deleted by deleting its associated controller.

4.16 Video Source
4.16.1 Video Source List View
The Video Source List View displays a list of configured video sources. Selecting a video
source will cause the Video Source Property Page to display its settings.
4.16.2 Video Source Property Page
4.16.2.1 Video Source Property Page
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 119
Administration Software
The Video Source Property Page is used to create and manage connections to video sources.
A video source is a channel for getting live or recorded video into the system. It can be either a
camera, such as a web cam, or IP camera or an input channel on a more complex device such
as a digital source video recorder.
To display the video source property page:
1. Select the Video Sources module.
2. Select a video source in the List View or
select the New button.
.
The following can then be specified:
Name The name of the video source (specified by data entry).
Description A description of the video source (specified by data entry).
Type The type of video source (selected from a drop-down list).
To add / update / delete a video source:
• Click here.
To configure a video source:
• Click here.
4.16.2.2 Add/Update/Delete a Video Source
• Select the Video Source module.
To add a video source:
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.
2. Select the required camera type, click the Configure button and enter the camera address
and press F1 to obtain help).
3. Select Add.
To update a video source:
1. Select a video source.
2. Modify the video source properties as required.
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or select Cancel to discard changes.
To delete a video source:
1. Select a video source, and click the Configure button.
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the video source.

4.16.3 Video Sources - Configure
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 120
Administration Software
4.16.3.1 Configuring Video Sources
Video sources are configured using the Configure Video Source window, which is displayed
by clicking the Configure button on the Video Source Property Page.
The Configure Video Source window has two tabs: General and Presets.
4.16.3.2 Video Sources - General Tab
This tab is used to
1. Configure the connection to the video source that was created in the Video Source
Property Page, and
2. Display the feed from a configured camera.
To display general video source information:
1. Select the Video Sources module.
2. Select a video source in the List View or
select the New button.
3. Select the Configure button.
4. If necessary, select the General tab.
The following can then be specified:
Name The name of the video source (specified by data entry).
Description The description of the video source (specified by data entry).
Address The address of the video source (specified by data entry and
selecting the Connect button).
User (optional) The user name required by the source in order to connect to it
(specified by data entry).
Password (optional) The password required by the source in order to connect to it
(specified by data entry).
In addition to these options, other options may be displayed which are dependant upon the type
of video source being configured.
Web / LAN Image
Interval (ms) The refresh rate of the video display (specified by increments or
data entry).
Axis IP Camera
PTZ If this checkbox is selected, the video source being configured
has Pan, Tilt and Zoom functionality and enables the View tab in
the Preset tab.
Intivid
Camera The camera associated with the Intivid DVR unit (selected from a
drop-down list after it has been connected).
PTZ 1 If this checkbox is selected, the video source being configured
has Pan, Tilt and Zoom functionality and enables the View tab in
the Preset tab.
1 Only if camera has PTZ facilities.
To confirm the specification, select the OK button.

4.16.3.3 Video Sources - Presets Tab
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 121
Administration Software
The Presets tab is used to configure presets for a video source.
The left hand side of the tab contains a list of presets, and the right hand side displays several
tabs that are used to configure the selected preset. The tabs available are: General, View (if
the source supports PTZ) and Alarm Points.
The tabs General and Alarm Points are available for all three of the supported camera types
(Axis IP Camera, Web / LAN Image and Intvid).
In addition to the General and Alarm Points tabs, a third tab View , is only available for video
sources that support PTZ.
Presets
A preset is an alarm point and / or view that is associated with the selected video source, and
is used in the Alarm Viewer application. Three different types of preset exist:
1. Alarm Point Preset - an association of an alarm point with a video source. Selecting this
preset in the Alarm Viewer application will cause the associated video feed to be displayed
in the Video Source area.
2. Preset- an definition of a PTZ setting for a video source. Selecting this preset in the Alarm
Viewer Application will cause the video source to move to the PTZ position specified. This
option is only available for video sources that use PTZ.
3. Alarm Point and View Preset - an association of an alarm point and PTZ settings with a
video source. Selecting this preset in the Alarm Viewer Application will:
a. cause the associated video feed to be displayed in the Video Source area.
b. cause the video source to move to the PTZ position specified by that views
Adding and Deleting Presets
Presets are added and deleted using the Add and Delete buttons located on the right hand side
of the Presets tab.
4.16.3.4 Presets Tab - General Tab
A description of the Presets facility is given in the Video Sources - Presets Tab section.
To display general presets information:
1. Select the Video Sources module.
2. Select a video source in the List View or
select the New button.
3. Select the Configure button.
4. Select the Presets tab.
5. If necessary, select the General tab.
The following can then be specified:
Name The name of the preset (specified by data entry).
Description The description of the preset (specified by data entry).
To confirm the specification, select the OK button.

4.16.3.5 Presets Tab - View Tab
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 122
Administration Software
This tab is only available if the video source being configured supports PTZ.
A description of the Presets facility is given in the Video Sources - Presets Tab section.
This tab is used to specify the pan, tilt and zoom settings of the preset. The horizontal scroll
bars control the camera's panning. The vertical scroll bar is used to control the camera's tilting,
and the slide bar located next to the vertical toolbar is used to set the camera's zoom level.
Better control can be achieved by clicking or dragging the mouse on the video window, and
using the scroll wheel.
To display view information:
1. Select the Video Sources module.
2. Select a video source in the List View or
select the New button.
3. Select the Configure button.
4. Select the Presets tab.
5. If necessary, select the View tab.
The Set button is used to set the PTZ preset to the camera's current position.
The Reset button is used to return the camera to the default PTZ settings.
To confirm the specification, select the OK button.
4.16.3.6 Presets Tab - Alarm Points
A description of the Presets facility is given in the Video Sources - Presets Tab section.
This tab is used to associate an alarm point with the selected preset.
In the Alarm Viewer, clicking on an alarm point, that has been configured in this tab, will cause
the CCTV region to display video from the associated source, and will PTZ to the preset
specified in the View tab (if available).
To display alarm points information:
1. Select the Video Sources module.
2. Select a video source in the List View or
select the New button.
3. Select the Configure button.
4. Select the Presets tab.
5. If necessary, select the Alarm Points tab.
The Add button is used to add an alarm point selected from a drop-down list.
The Delete button is used to delete the selected alarm point.
To confirm the specification, select the OK button.

4.17 Reports
4.17.1 Report Facilities
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 123
Administration Software
The reports available are described in the Reports Provided section. When displayed, the
report will be populated with the current data in the Administration Software database.
Custom reports can be created using Crystal Reports and added to the system as described in
the Add a Custom Report section.
When selecting a report that requests search parameters, it is strongly recommended
to specify search criteria that will not generate an excessive amount of data that will
take a long time to process.
To display a report:
1. Select the Reports tab in the Explorer
bar.
2. Select a report to display.
3. If a Report Search Parameters window is
displayed, see the Report Search
Parameters section.
The report can be moved about the screen by
dragging and dropping the tab (see Tear Off
Controls). If dragged away from the main
window a Landscape button is available to
change the orientation of the report.
The report has the following toolbar:
The Export Report icon exports the report to a different format which can
then be saved, see Export a Report section.
The Go to First Page icon displays first page of the report.
The Go to Previous Page icon steps backwards through the report
pages.
The Go to Next Page icon steps forwards through the report pages.
The Go to Last Page icon displays the last page of the report.
The Page Number icon displays the current page and total number of
pages.
The Stop Loading icon is red when it can be used to stop a requested
report from being displayed and is only applicable to large reports that are
taking a long time to display.
The Search icon searches for specified text in the report.
The Size icon displays the report in the selected size.
To display the report with different search criteria:
1. Select the New Report button and the Report Search Parameters window is displayed.
2. Select the search criteria and select Search.
To set the page layout for printing a report:
3. Select the Page Setup button and the Windows Page Setup window is displayed.
4. Select the print options and select OK.
To print a report:
• Select the Print button.

To close the report:
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 124
Administration Software
Select the button.
4.17.2 Reports Provided
The following reports are provided when applicable:
Note
Some reports require search parameters to be specified (see the Report Search
Parameters section).
17-Week Average - Detail A detailed break down of the time worked by a specified keyholder or
keyholders over a specified 17-week period and determines
compliance to the Working Time (Amendment) Regulations 2003
Statutory Instrument 2003 No. 1684. A warning is displayed if the
average working time exceeds 48 hours or if the working time in
any week exceeds 60 hours.
If entry and exit areas are not specified, the report will calculate the
difference between the earliest and latest access events for each day.
17-Week Average - A summary of the time worked by a specified keyholder or keyholders
Summary
over a specified 17-week period and determines compliance to the
Working Time (Amendment) Regulations 2003 Statutory
Instrument 2003 No. 1684. A warning is displayed if the 48 hour
weekly average is exceeded.
If entry and exit areas are not specified, the report will calculate the
difference between the earliest and latest access events for each day.
2100/2200 Controllers A list of specified door controllers and associated details, limits and
doors.
512 Controllers A list of specified access controllers and associated details, limits and
doors.
512 Controllers I/O A list of access controllers on specified 500 channel(s) and details of
their inputs and outputs.
520/ 530 Controllers A list of input and output controllers on specified 500 channel(s) and
details of their inputs and outputs.
Access Groups A list of specified access groups and associated time profiles and
areas.
Access History A list of areas (and associated doors) accessed by a specified
keyholder between specified dates.
Note
This report indicates when a key has been presented to a door's
reader but will not detect when a keyholder has tailgated into or out of
an area or used a Request to Exit switch.
Area Authorisation A list of specified areas and associated keyholders with their access
groups and time profiles.
Areas A list of specified areas and associated doors.
Area Usage A list of specified keyholders and their area usage.
Attendance A list of specified keyholders and times they entered and left an area or
opened a door. The report will calculate the difference between the
earliest and latest access events for each day.
Note
Categories A list of keyholder categories and associated area usage.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 125
Administration Software
Channels A list of all communication channels and associated details and
settings.
Channels (500) A list of specified 500 TCP/IP channels and associated details and
settings.
Controller Barcode A controller barcode table of probed controllers.
Controllers A list of controllers and associated details.
Dead Keys A list of keyholders who have not used their keys after a specified date.
Door Controller Summary A list of all probed access controllers arranged by channel with
associated channel protocol type and controller firmware version.
Doors A list of all doors and associated details, configuration and access.
Event Alarm History A list of alarms generated between specified dates.
Events A list of the events for specified criteria.
Excessive Key Use A list of keys that have been used more than a specified number of
times within a specified period.
Guest Authorisation A list of specified guests from other organisational units and
associated authorisation.
Holiday Profiles A list of all holiday profiles and associated holiday periods.
Key Expiry A list of keyholders whose keys expired on or after a specified date.
Keyholder Authorisation A list of specified keyholders and associated authorisation.
Keyholder Images A list of keyholder photos and signatures that satisfy a specified search
criteria.
Keyholder List A list of keyholders that satisfy a specified search criteria.
Keyholders A list of specified keyholders and associated details.
Last Area Access A list of specified areas accessed by specified keyholders and the time
accessed on the present date.
Note
This report indicates when a key has been presented to a door's
reader but will not detect when a keyholder has tailgated into or
out of an area or used a Request to Exit switch.
Modems A list of modems attached to the PC and associated details.
Operators A list of all operators and associated details.
Offline Controllers A list of connected offline controllers associated details.
Time & Mode Profiles A list of selected time and mode profiles and associated time periods.

4.17.3 Report Search Parameters
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 126
Administration Software
Some reports require search criteria to display relevant information (e.g. a list of keyholders).
When such a report is selected the Report Search Parameters window is displayed (e.g. only
list keyholders with the surname Smith).
Notes
1. When selecting a report that requests search parameters, it is strongly recommended to
specify search criteria that will not generate an excessive amount of data that will take a
long time to process.
2. If organisational units are licensed, the organisational unit(s) to include in the search can be
specified. The default is the current (active) organisational unit.
3. To filter a report on a name that contains an apostrophe, e.g. O'Brian, enter two single
quotes in place of the apostrophe in the report parameters (e.g .O''Brian).
4. To get the best from the Attendance, 17 Week Average (Detailed), 17 Week Average
(Summary) reports, follow this recommendation:
• When specifying an entry and exit area, ensure that the keyholder accesses those
areas at appropriate times to ensure accurate data is generated. If entry and exit
areas are not specified, the report will calculate the difference between the earliest
and latest area access times.
To specify report search parameters:
1. Select the Reports tab in the Explorer
bar.
2. Select a report to display.
3. If report search parameters are required, a
Report Search Parameters window is
displayed.
4. Select the search parameters:
• Select a search parameter on the left
and the button and the search
parameters is added to the report
search options.
• Select the button and all search
parameters are added to the report
search options.
• Select the button and all search
parameters are removed from the report
search options..
• Select a search parameter on the right
and the button and the search
parameter is removed from the report
search options.
Note
Mandatory search parameters cannot be
removed.
5. Select each search parameter in turn and
specify the required search criteria.
Wildcards * (used to substitute zero or
more characters) and ? (used to substitute

a single character) can be used in data
entry fields). Some fields cannot be
changed.
6. If organisational units are licensed, select
the appropriate checkbox(es).
7. If you want to create a report that always
uses the same search criteria, select the
Save button and enter a name for the
report.
8. Select the Search button.
4.17.4 Export a Report
To export a report:
1. Display a report.
2. Select the icon and the Export
window is displayed.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 127
Administration Software
The following can then be specified:
Format The format to export to (selected from a drop-down list).
Destination The destination of the export (selected from a drop-down list):
Application Exports the report to a temp file in the specified format and then opens
the file in the appropriate application.
The file name of the report and the file name of the temp file cannot be
the same.
When exporting in Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) format, the
'application' and the 'disk file' are the same, so the destination is not
specified. The ODBC data source must be set up through ODBC
Administrator in order for the program to export to a particular ODBC
database format.
When exporting in HTML format, a file path is requested.
Disk File Saves the report to the specified disk or diskette.
Lotus cc:Mail Exports the report to a mail message.
(VIM)
The character-separated values (separator and delimiter), mail number,
date format and password are requested.
Lotus
Exports the report to the specified Lotus Domino server.
Domino
Version 3.0 or later of the Lotus Domino client is required and, at a
minimum, depositor access. Export to a Lotus Domino OS/2 client is not
possible.
Microsoft Exports the report to a mail message.
Mail (MAPI)
The formatting options depending on the format selected are requested.
Note
The report can be exported to Crystal Reports.

4.17.5 Add a Report to Favourites
To display the Favourite Reports
Manager window:
• Select Reports > Manage Favourites
and the Favourite Reports Manager
window is displayed.
To add a report to favourites:
1. Select the Add button and the Add
Favourite Report window is displayed.
2. Navigate to where the report to be
added is located and double click on
the required report.
3. Select the Save button to confirm the
selection or the Discard Changes
button to cancel the selection.
To delete a report from favourites:
1. Select the report on the Favourite
Reports Manager window.
2. Select the Delete button
3. Select the Save button to confirm the
deletion or the Discard Changes
button to cancel the deletion.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 128
Administration Software

4.17.6 Add a Custom Report
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 129
Administration Software
A report can be created using Crystal Reports and can access the Administration Software
database to display current data. The report files can be created and tested in the Custom
folder or added using Reports > Custom Report Manager.
For further information on creating reports, contact Technical Support.
To display the Custom Report Manager
window:
• Select Reports > Custom Report
and the Custom Report Manager
window is displayed.
A shared report or a private report can be
added. A shared report can be displayed
by other Windows users. A private report
cannot be displayed by other Windows
users but can be displayed by different
operators if using the same Windows
account.
To add a custom report:
1. If necessary, select the Installed
Custom Report tab.
2. Select the appropriate Add button and
the Add Custom Report window is
displayed.
3. Navigate to where the report to be
added is located and double click on
the required report.
4. Select the Close button.
To delete a custom report:
1. If necessary, select the Installed
Custom Report tab.
2. Select the report to be deleted.
3. Select the Delete button.
4. Select the Close button.
To delete a saved report:
1. If necessary, select the Saved Report
Queue tab.
2. Select the report to be deleted.
3. Select the Delete button.
4. Select the Close button.

5. Image Capture
5.1 Image Capture Introduction
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 130
Image Capture
The Image Capture Utility is used to capture images from files, Video for Windows devices and
TWAIN devices, for use in the Signature and Photo image fields in the Keyholder property page.
To capture an image:
1. Select the Keyholders module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
• To capture a photo image,
select the Details tab and
Capture button at the bottom of
the photo frame.
• To capture a signature image
select the Personal Details tab
and Capture button at the
bottom of the signature frame.
Click here for information on using the Image Capture Utility.
5.2 Using the Image Capture Utility
Image Capture Utility is divided into two panes: Capture Source and Preview Window.
Capture Source
This area is used to select an image file, or an item of hardware to be used to capture an
image.
Click here for more information.
Preview Window
This area displays the image that was captured / is being captured using the capture source,
allowing the image to be cropped before placing it into the keyholder record.
Click here for more information.
5.3 Capture Source
There are three tabs displayed in this area: File, TWAIN and Video.
File
This tab is used to select an image file from a local or network location.
A Windows explorer style "tree" is displayed that is used to navigate to, and select an image file.
The image files displayed in the tree are determined by the filter options set in the Show File
Types pulldown list beneath the tree. By default this is set to all supported file types.
The selected image file is displayed in the Preview Window.
TWAIN
This tab displays a list of TWAIN compatible image capture devices, for example, scanners and
digital cameras. Before selecting an image capture device ensure that it is correctly configured
(you may need to refer to its documentation).
Select the required TWAIN device and click the Acquire Image button - the video or scan will be
displayed in a separate window (follow the instructions for your imaging device to capture the
desired image). The captured image will be displayed in the Preview Window.
Video
This tab displays a list of Video for Windows compatible devices, for example webcams. Before
selecting a Video device ensure that it is correctly configured (you may need to refer to its

documentation).
Select the required Video for Windows device to view its live image feed in the Preview
Window.
Click the Freeze button to freeze the display in the Preview Window.
5.4 Preview Window
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 131
Image Capture
This area displays the image that was selected or captured from the Capture Source area, and
is used to place the image into the keyholder’s Photo or Signature field.
Images displayed in this area may first be cropped before being captured (placed) into the
keyholder record.
Importing an image uncropped
By default the Show Crop Box option is enabled. Uncheck the Show Crop Box option and
then click the Capture button.
Note
A cropped image will have the same aspect ratio as the area it will be displayed in and is
displayed correctly. Uncropped images may not have the appropriate aspect ratio and
may therefore be displayed incorrectly.
Cropping an image
Ensure the Show Crop Box option is checked. Cropping an image will preserve only the
selected part of it - allowing background, unnecessary detail, etc to be removed.
To define the crop area: click and drag anywhere on the captured image to insert a crop box. It
may then be resized by clicking with primary mouse button on the boundary box and dragging.
The shape of the crop box is determined from where the Image Capture Utility is launched from:
Photo Crop box ratio 3:4
Signature Crop box ration 3:1
After an area has been selected click the Crop Button.
Placing an image into a keyholder record
When you have cropped the selected image, or removed the crop box, click the Capture Button
at the bottom of the Preview Window area to insert it into the keyholder record.

6. ID Card Designer
6.1 Card Designer Introduction
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 132
ID Card Designer
The ID Card Designer is used to design ID cards. Each design for an ID card is associated with
a Keyholder Category - assigning a category will associate a specific card design to a
keyholder.
6.1.1 Displaying the Card Designer
The ID Card Designer can launched from the following locations:
1. Selecting ID-Card Designer in the Shortcut tab of the Explorer bar.
2. Selecting the Tools > Card Designer.
3. Selecting the ID-Card Designer icon located in the Categories tab of the
Organisation Options window (Tools > Options)
6.1.2 Interactive Map
Click here to view an interactive map of the ID-Card Designer.
6.2 Card Designer Menus
6.2.1 Design Menu
The Design menu contains the following items:
Import - If the file to be imported was exported as a selected items, it will be imported onto the
current card face. If the file to be imported was exported as a design, it will replace the current
ID-Card design.
Export - Two export options are displayed:
1. Selection - Exports the selected items or the selected card face to a file in the
specified location.
2. Design - Exports the entire ID-Card to the specified location.
Update - Updates (saves) the current ID-Card.
Exit - Exits the Card Designer without saving changes.
6.2.2 Edit Menu
The Edit Menu contains the following items:
Cut - cuts the item(s) selected on the Main View. This function is also available in the Toolbar.
Copy - copies the item(s) selected on the Main View. This function is also available in the
Toolbar.
Paste - pastes the item(s) that has been cut or copied. This function is also available in the
Toolbar.
Delete - deletes the item(s) selected This function is also available in the Toolbar.
Select All - selects all items on the card face.
Card Face Properties - selecting this item will cause the Properties Region to display the
properties of the selected card face.
Align to Grid - click here.
Bring to Front - click here.
Send to Back - click here.
Group Items - groups the selected items. Click here for more information.
Ungroup Items - ungroups the selected group. Click here for more information.

6.2.3 View Menu
The menu contains the following items:
Units - selects the scale used by the Ruler. The scale can also be changed by the Ruler
Context Menu.
1. None (turns of the ruler, e.g. for "not to scale diagrams")
2. Inches,
3. Millimetres,
4. Centimetres,
5. Metres.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 133
ID Card Designer
Zoom - Displays a submenu which allows you to change the card face zoom level.
Small Icons - this item toggles between small and large icons for all items in the Toolbars and
Add Items Region.
6.2.4 Help Menu
Selecting the item Contents displays the ID Card Designer helpfile.
6.3 Toolbar, Browser and Status Bar
6.3.1 Card Designer Toolbar
The ID-Card designer toolbar contains the following items:
Select
Zoom
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
Print
Preview
Zoom in
Zoom out
Show Full Card
Face
Bring to Front
Enables select mode, which is used to select single or multiple items
on the card face. Click here for more information.
Allows the user to zoom in and zoom out on the card face view by
using mouse buttons, keys or the mouse wheel. Click here for more
information.
Cut the selected item or card face. This function is also available in
the Edit Menu.
Copy the selected item or card face. This function is also available in
the Edit Menu.
Paste the item or card face which has been cut or copied. This
function is also available in the Edit Menu.
Delete the selected item or card face. This function is also available
in the Edit Menu.
This will print the current design using the specified printer.
Click here for information about double sided printing.
This will display a window containing a print preview of the current
design using the specified printer.
Increase the magnification of the card face. Click here for more
information.
Decrease the magnification of the card face. Click here for more
information.
Decrease the magnification so that the full card face will be
displayed. This function is also available in the View Menu.
Sends the selected item to the front of the card face - click here for
more information.

Send to Back
Group
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 134
ID Card Designer
Sends the selected item to the back of the card face - click here for
more information.
Groups the selected items. Click here for more information.
Ungroup Items Ungroups the selected group. Click here for more information.
6.3.2 Card Designer Browser
The Keyholder/Category Browser toolbar (pictured above) is used to:
1. Select an ID-Card design to edit. which will be displayed in the Card Design region.
2. Select a keyholder associated with the selected category, which causes the card
design to display its data items populated with the keyholder's relevant details.
6.3.3 Card Designer Status Bar
The status bar, located at the bottom of the ID Card Designer application, displays the following
information :
1. X and Y coordinates of the mouse pointer, in the selected units for the card face.
2. Item Size - the size in the specified units of the item selected on the card face.
3. Mode Selected - the icon displayed here reflects the item that has been selected in the
Add Area or Toolbar. For example it displays a picture of magnifying glass and the word
"zoom" if zoom mode is selected, a shape icon and the word "shape" if shapes are
selected etc.
4. Operator Name - the name of the operator currently logged on.
5. Zoom Level - the current level of magnification.
6.4 Design Regions
6.4.1 Add Items Region
This region contains the following items that are used to and create designs on the selected
card face.
Shape
Image
Line
Text
Photo
This is used to create shapes; the default is a square. Six other shapes are
available by changing the items Shape Properties.
Click here to view a shape item's properties.
This is used to create frames which display the image file specified in its Image
Property.
Click here to view an image item's properties.
This is used to create lines on the card face whose thickness is specified using the
Line Width Property.
Click here to view its properties.
This is used to create a box which displays the text specified by its Text Properties.
Click here to view its properties.
This item displays a keyholder photo (if one is present) when a keyholder is
selected in the Card Designer Browser.
Click here to view its properties.

Signature
Text Data
6.4.1.1 Creating Designs
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 135
ID Card Designer
This item displays a keyholder signature (if one is present) when a keyholder is
selected in the Card Designer Browser.
Click here to view its properties.
These items display keyholder text data (e.g. title, first name, last name, etc.) when
a keyholder is selected in the Card Designer Browser.
Click here to view their properties.
Click here for more information on using any of the above items to create designs.
6.4.1.2 ID-Card Design Overview
Click here for more information.
6.4.2 Card Face Region
This region is where the ID-Card is designed by using items from the Add Items Region.
6.4.2.1 Selecting Card Faces
To select a card face click a tab, which are located above the current card face,
6.4.2.2 Mouse Coordinates
The coordinates of the mouse pointer on the page are displayed in the Status Bar.
6.4.2.3 Card Face Properties
The selected card face has the following properties:
Name Snap Grid Colour
Units Holopatch
Background Colour Smart Card
Background Image Magnetic Stripe
Snap Grid
Snap Grid Size
6.4.2.4 Rulers
Orientation
The rulers on the selected card face can have their units changed from:
1. the View Menu, or
2. the Units Property of the Card Face Properties, or
3. the rulers Context Menu.
6.4.2.5 Viewing Card Face Properties
To view the card face properties, select it by clicking on any empty area of the card face.
6.4.2.6 Editing Card Face Properties
Click here for more information.

6.4.3 Properties Region
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 136
ID Card Designer
This region displays the properties of the selected item on the selected page.
The properties of all pages and items in the card design define their appearance and behaviour
on the card face. Changes to the properties of items in the card design will be reflected on the
card face.
Click on an entry below to view more information on it.
Shape Properties Multiple Item Properties
Image Properties Group Properties
Line Properties Card Face Properties
Text Properties
6.4.3.1 Editing Item Properties
Click here for more information.
6.4.3.2 Update / Exit
These buttons located beneath the properties area respectively update (save) the ID-Card
design and exit the application.
6.4.4 Buttons Region
6.4.4.1 Assign a Name to this Item
This button is no longer used. To change the name of an item, edit the Name Property.
6.4.4.2 Update Button
Clicking this button will save any changes to the current design.
6.4.4.3 Exit Button
This button will exit the ID-Card Designer. To ensure any changes have been made, click the
Update button first.
You will be warned if you have not saved your changes when this button is pressed.

6.5 Card Design Overview
Drawing and placing items
Click here for more information on creating designs.
Editing ID-Card Designs
Select Mode
Select mode is used to edit ID-Card designs.
Click here for more information.
Grouping and ungrouping
Merge many items into one item, or
breakdown a group into its constituent parts.
Click here for more information.
Viewing Properties
Click here for more information.
Rulers and Measurement
Click here for more information.
Docking Items
Click here for more information.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 137
Moving, resizing and deleting
Click here for more information.
Context Menus
Context Menus are used to edit items.
Aligning items to the Grid
Click here for information.
Ordering items on a card face
Click here for more information.
Properties
Click here for more information on editing the properties of a card face or an item on the card
face.
Double Sided Printing
Click here for more information on printing double sided ID-cards.
6.5.1 Drawing and Placing Items
ID Card Designer
Items from the Add Items Region can be placed on the selected card face by using two different
methods:
1. Dragging and dropping.
2. Selecting and clicking.
6.5.1.1 Dragging and Dropping
Any item from the Add Items Region can be placed on the selected card face by selecting the
item and dragging it to the required location on the page while holding down the mouse button.
6.5.1.2 Selecting and Clicking
Items can be placed on the selected card face by selecting it, and then clicking on the required
area to place it. How an item is placed is dependant upon whether it is a fixed shape item,
variable shape item or line.
After selecting an item the ID-Card designer stays in this mode until a different one is selected.
The mode is indicated in the Status Bar.
6.5.1.3 Fixed Shape Items
Fixed shape items (indicated above) are items that when placed have a predetermined size,
which cannot be changed. However, text items' sizes can be adjusted by using the Font
Property.

To place a fixed shape item select it and click the required area on the card face to place it.
6.5.1.4 Variable Shape Items
Variable shape items (indicated above) are items whose rectangular size is determined by
clicking twice on the card face: the first click specifies the location of the item’s top left corner
the second click specifies the location of the bottom right corner.
6.5.1.5 Line
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 138
ID Card Designer
Lines can be placed in two ways: individually or many.
Individually: After selecting the line item, clicking on the card face defines the line's start point
and releasing it defines its end point.
Many: Selecting the card face will specify a line's start point and clicking a second time will
specify its end point, causing that line to be drawn, clicking a third time will specify the end point
of the next line - the end point of the previous line is start of the current line.
To end drawing press the Esc key, click the Toolbar's select function or right click.
6.5.2 Editing Properties
The properties of all items and both ID-card faces in the ID-Card Designer define their
appearance and behaviour. Changes to the properties of anything within the ID-Card Design
Editor will be instantly reflected on the card face.
Item Properties
To edit an item's properties you must first be in Select Mode. Click the require item and the
Properties Region will display that items properties allowing them to be edited.
ID-Card Face Properties
To view and edit the properties of the selected ID-Card face ensure that all items on the face
are unselected.
6.5.3 Grouping and Ungrouping
When the Group command is applied to two or more selected objects, they will behave as if
they are a single item - clicking on a constituent item will cause the group to be selected, and
clicking and dragging a single item will cause all of them to move. Grouped items can be rotated
or docked as a single item.
Grouping Items
To group items:
1. Enter Select Mode,
2. Select the required items.
3. Select the group command from any of the following locations: Edit Menu, Toolbar or
the Context Menu of the selected group.
Ungrouping a Group
To ungroup a group and return it to its constituent components, select it and then use the
ungroup command from any of the following locations: Edit Menu, Toolbar or the Context
Menu of the selected group.
Resizing Groups
Groups cannot be resized.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 139
ID Card Designer
6.5.4 Select Mode
Before any item can be moved, resized, group / ungroups or deleted select mode must be
entered. To enter select mode click the select item from the Toolbar or click the Esc key.
Note: The current mode of the ID-Card Designer is displayed in the Status Bar.
Selecting Items
When an item or group is selected, its properties will be displayed in the Properties Region.
To select multiple items either:
1. Hold the Shift key down and select the required items.
2. Selecting a blank part of the card face and then dragging will cause a selection area
to appear. Any items that fall within the selection area will become selected.
Note: Holding the Ctrl key and clicking a selected item will toggle its selection status.
Select All
To select all items on the card face, use the select all function by:
1. Selecting the item Select All on the Edit Menu.
2. Holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the key 'A'
Properties
Selecting any item on the card face will cause the Properties Region to display the properties of
that item.
6.5.5 Move, Resize and Delete
This page describes how to perform the listed actions on single items, multiple items or
groups, after entering Select Mode.
1. Move,
2. Resize, or
3. Delete.
Moving
Select an item or group and drag to move it around. Release the button to stop moving it.
Resizing
After an item has been selected it is enclosed by a rectangular boundary box that
has on each side and corner grab handles.
Solid black grab handles (pictured left top) indicate that the item or group can be
resized by click and drag. Outlined grab handles in each corner (pictured left
middle) indicate the item cannot be resized by click and drag. The Text Properties
can be used to allow resizing of text items.
Items with their Aspect Lock Property set to on, have grab handles in the middle of
each side (picture bottom left), and maintain their aspect ratio when resized.
Notes:
Groups cannot be resized.
The size of a Text Item can only be adjusted with the Font Property.
Deleting
Items or groups can be deleted from the card face by:
1. Selecting the delete option from its Context Menu, or
2. Selecting it and pressing in the Delete key, or
3. Selecting it, dragging it off the main view and releasing the button, or

4. Using the delete function button on the Toolbar, or the Edit Menu.
6.5.6 Printing Double-Sided ID Cards on a Single-Sided ID Card Printer
6.5.6.1 Printing from the ID Card Designer
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 140
ID Card Designer
The ID Card designer will only print cards appropriate to the selected category. All of the front
sides for the category will be printed first, followed by all of the back sides.
Printing Double-Sided Cards
To print double-sided ID cards on a single-sided ID Card printer, you must follow the following
instructions:
1. Load the printer with a enough ID cards to complete the print job.
2. Begin the printing process: select Design Menu > Print, select the required printer
type, and click OK.
3. The printing process will begin, shortly afterwards a dialogue will be displayed that will
ask you if want to begin print the back sides of the ID Cards. You MUST wait until the
printing process for the front sides has finished. Take all of the cards that have been
printed, and reinsert them into the ID card printer hopper (consult the printer's operation
instructions to determine the correct loading procedure).
4. Click Ok to confirm the back side printing dialogue, and the ID card back side printing
will begin.
6.5.6.2 Batch Printing ID Cards from Keyholder Module
Batch printing is where two or more ID cards are printed in one session. This is done by
selecting more than one keyholder and then the File > Print ID Card menu. The keyholders
selected for batch printing may belong to different categories which will require arranging for
printing:
1. All double-sided ID cards, in alphabetic order, all front sides for the category, followed
by all back sides.
2. All single-sided ID cards, in alphabetic order.
For example: If many categories of card holder are printed, the front side of all the first
category of double-sided ID cards will be printed first, followed by the back side of the first
category; this will be repeated for all double-sided categories, and then will move onto single
side categories.
Printing Double-Sided Cards
To print double-sided ID cards on a single-sided ID Card printer, you must follow the following
instructions:
1. Load the printer with a enough ID cards to complete the print job.
2. Select the required keyholder entries from the keyholder list view, and to print them:
o Select File Menu > Print ID Card, select the required printer type, and click
OK, or
o Right click any of the selected keyholder entries, select Print ID Card, select
the required printer type, and select OK.
3. Begin the printing process: select Design Menu > Print, select the required printer
type, and click OK.
4. The printing process will begin, shortly afterwards a while a dialogue will be displayed
that will ask you if want to begin print the back sides of the ID Cards. You MUST wait
until the printing process for the front sides has finished. Take all of the cards that have
been printed, and reinsert them into the ID card printer hopper (consult the printer's
operation instructions to determine the correct loading procedure).
5. Click Ok to confirm the back side printing dialogue, and the ID card back side printing
will begin.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 141
ID Card Designer
After the first category has been printed, the next category will begin printed and so on until the
final category has been completed.
6.6 Item Properties
6.6.1 Multiple Item Properties
When multiple items are selected on the page, the Properties Region displays a set of
properties common to all of the selected items. When these common properties are edited, the
respective property for each item will be changed as well.
When two or more items are selected the following properties are displayed:
The following properties are displayed when multiple items are selected:
Aspect Lock Shadow
Anchor Density
Angle Shadow X
Transparency Shadow Y
Editing the Item's Properties
Click here for more information.
6.6.2 Group Item
A group item is two or more items that have been grouped using the group command. A group
item has the following properties:
X Transparency
Y Shadow
Anchor Density
Angle Shadow Y
Aspect Lock Shadow X
Creating a Group
To create a group, you must select two or more items on the card face, and use the group
command on the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.
Ungrouping a Group
To ungroup a group, you must select the required group, and use the ungroup command on
the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.
Editing Group Properties
Any changes made to the properties of a group will be applied to the relevant properties of its
constituent items.
Click here for more information on editing groups.
Resizing a Group
Groups cannot be resized.
6.6.3 Shape Item Properties
A shape selected on a page has the following properties:
Name Shape
X Fill Colour
Y Border Colour
Width Line Width
Height Shadow

Aspect Lock Density
Anchor Shadow X
Angle Shadow Y
Transparency
Editing the Item's Properties
Click here for more information.
6.6.4 Image Item / Photo Item / Signature Item Properties
Image Item, Photo Item and Signature Item have the following common properties:
Name Anchor
Data Field (photo and Angle
signature items only)
Transparency
X Image (image item only)
Y Shadow
Width Density
Height Shadow X
Aspect Lock Shadow Y
Editing the Item's Properties
Click here for more information.
6.6.5 Line Item Properties
A line has the following properties:
Name Colour
X Line Width
Y Shadow
Width Density
Height Shadow X
Anchor Shadow Y
Transparency
Aligning to Axis
A line can be aligned to the closest axis (straightened) by selecting Align to Axis from the
Context Menu.
Editing the Item's Properties
Click here for more information.
6.6.6 Text Item / Text Data Item Properties
A text item or text data item selected on a card face has the following properties:
Name Colour
X Multi-line
Y Shadow
Anchor Density
Angle Shadow X
Transparency Shadow Y
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 142
ID Card Designer

Text (text item only) Data Field (text data item only)
Font
Editing the Item's Properties
Click here for more information.
6.7 Individual Properties
6.7.1 Name Property
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 143
ID Card Designer
The name of the item. This is can be edited and is used if the item is to be linked to other items
and is only required when configuring the Action Property.
6.7.2 Units Properties
Allows the user to select the units that the card face is displaying values in. Click here.
6.7.3 Background Properties
Background Colour
Click the button on right hand side to display the colour picker that selects the card face's
background colour.
Background image
Click the button on right hand side to display the Open File dialog. This will allow you to
navigate to, and select a graphic file, which will be displayed on the map's selected side. The
file formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, TIF and WMF are supported.
Removing an Image
To remove an image from a card face background or from an image item without deleting it
(i.e. leaving an empty frame), select the image property and press the Delete key.
6.7.4 Snap Properties
Snap Grid
There are three options associated with this property:
1. No snap grid - no grid / dots displayed. This option disables the "snap to" when placing
items.
2. Snap only - items snap to an invisible grid. The size of the grid is determined by the
Snap Grid Size property (see below).
3. Grid - displays a grid on the card face which items snap to. The size of the grid is
determined by the Snap Grid Size property (see below).
Snap Grid Size
Sets the scale used by the displayed grid / dots in the units specified in the Units Properties.
Snap Grid Colour
Sets the colour of the grid. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will display a
colour selector.
Preventing Snap to Grid
To prevent items snapping to the grid when moving them, hold down the Shift key when moving
them.
6.7.5 Holopatch / Magstripe / Smart Card Properties
6.7.5.1.1 Holopatch
This property has the following values selected from a drop-down list:
1. Off - (default) Holopatch not displayed.
2. Show - displays a square on the front of the Card Design, that indicates the location of

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 144
ID Card Designer
a standard holopatch. Items beneath it remain visible.
3. Punch Out - displays a white square on the front of the Card Design. Items beneath it
are not visible and not printed.
6.7.5.1.2 Magstripe
This property has the following values selected from a drop-down list:
1. Off - (default) Magstripe not displayed.
2. Show - displays a rectangle on the Card Design back, indicating the location of a
magstripe on a standard card. Items beneath it remain visible.
3. Punch Out - displays a solid white rectangle on the Card Design back. Items beneath it
are not visible and not printed.
6.7.5.1.3 Smartcard
This property has the following values selected from a drop-down list:
1. Off - (default) Smartcard not displayed.
2. Show - displays a square on the Card Design front, indicating the location of a the chip
on a standard smartcard. Items beneath it remain visible.
3. Punch Out- displays a white square on the Card Design front. Items beneath it are not
visible and not printed.
6.7.6 Orientation
This property toggles the orientation of the selected face between landscape and portrait.
Note
In order to change the orientation of a card, items on the card design that would no longer be
visible are deleted after changing the orientation. If such a situation occurs, a prompt to confirm
the orientation change will be displayed.
6.7.7 X, Y, Width and Height Properties
X
The distance, in the selected units, of the item's origin from the left side of the card face. The
origin location is set using the item's Anchor Property.
Y
The distance, in the selected units, of the item's origin the item from the top of the card face.
The origin location is set using the item's Anchor Property.
Width
The width of the object, in the selected units.
Height
The height of the object, in the selected units.

6.7.8 Aspect Lock Property
The Aspect Lock Property determines how a shape changes when it is resized using the
mouse.
6.7.9 Anchor and Angle Properties
6.7.9.1 Anchor
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 145
ID Card Designer
Aspect Lock Off
Object's right side is clicked and dragged.
Note how the grab handles' position differ from the Aspect Lock On
setting.
Aspect Lock On - item retains aspect ratio when resized.
Object's right side is clicked and dragged.
Note how the grab handles' position differs from the Aspect Lock Off
setting.
The Anchor Property controls where, in the selected item, its origin is located. The origin is
the point which it rotates around, and whose location determines the shape's X and Y
coordinate properties.
top left
left
bottom left
top
centre
bottom
top right
right
bottom right
The image below shows examples of how the alignment properties affect an item when it is
rotated 45 degrees clockwise . The red dot indicates the shape's origin.
Horizontal alignment: centre
Vertical alignment: centre
Horizontal alignment: right
Vertical alignment: bottom
6.7.9.2 Angle
Horizontal alignment: left
Vertical alignment: centre
Entering a value will rotate the shape around its origin. A positive value will rotate the item
clockwise, and a negative anticlockwise.
6.7.10 Transparency Property
A value between 0 (opaque) and 100 (transparent).

6.7.11 Shape Properties
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 146
ID Card Designer
Shape
The type of shape the selected item is: Circle, Square, Triangle, Star, Pentagon, Hexagon or
Burst.
Fill Colour
Sets the colour of the selected item's fill. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display
will display a colour selector.
Border Colour
Sets the colour of the selected item's border. Clicking on the button on the right side of the
display will display a colour selector.
6.7.12 Text Properties
Text entered here will be displayed in the text item on the card face. The text item can be is
resized using the Font property.
6.7.12.1 Font
This property controls the appearance of the text in the selected item.
Clicking the button on the right hand side displays the font editor, that is used to select font
type, font style, font size, font effect and scripting.
6.7.12.2 Multi-line
Setting this property to On will allow a text box to be resized, whilst setting it to Off prevents a
text box from being resized.
6.7.12.3 Colour
Sets the colour of the text. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will display a
colour selector.
6.7.13 Line Properties
6.7.13.1 Line Width
This property sets the line thickness of the selected:
1. Line (for lines), or
2. Border (for shapes).
The default value is 1. Setting this value to 0 will turn the line off.
6.7.13.2 Colour
Sets the colour of the line or border. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will
display a colour selector.
6.7.14 Image Property
This property is used to choose the image file that an item displays.
If the image property is specified as a background image for a card face, it will expand to fill
the card face, and cannot be resized.
If the image property is specified as an image for an image item, the image will be sized to fit
the image frame, and may therefore appear distorted. An image can be adjusted by using the
image items Context Menu.
Click the button on right hand side to display the Open File dialog. This will allow you to
navigate to, and select a graphic file, which will be displayed within the boundary box of the
image item. The file formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, TIF and WMF are supported.

Removing an Image
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 147
ID Card Designer
To remove an image from a card face background or from an image item without deleting the
frame (i.e. leaving an empty frame), select the image property and press the Delete key.
6.7.15 Shadow Properties
Shadow
Toggles shadow visibility.
Shadow X
The horizontal offset of a shadow. A positive value will cause the shadow to be displayed to the
right of the item.
Shadow Y
The vertical offset of a shadow. A positive value will cause the shadow to be displayed below
the item.
Shadow Density
The darkness of the shadow: 0 will make it invisible, and a value of 100 makes it black. By
default this value is set to 20 (light gray).
6.7.16 Colour Properties
Colour Property
Sets the colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will
display a colour selector.
Fill Colour Property
Sets the fill colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will
display a colour selector.
6.7.17 Data Field Property
This property specifies the keyholder database field that will populate the text data item or
photo/signature item when the ID-Card is printed or when a keyholder is selected from the
Card Designer Browser.
The text data fields available are:
1. Date of Birth
2. Email
3. Employee Number
4. First Name
5. Home Telephone
6. Initials
7. Last name
8. Mobile Telephone
9. Start Time Date
10. Title
11. Work Telephone
12. Keyholder Extra Information fields 1 - 5 - these values are only available if they are
defined in the Keyholder Extra Information tab of the Organisation Options window,
selected from the Tools Menu.
The photo/signature fields available are:
13. Photo

14. Signature
6.8 Group Item Properties
6.8.1 Group Item Properties
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 148
ID Card Designer
A group item is two or more items that have been grouped using the group command. A group
item has the following properties:
X Transparency
Y Shadow
Anchor Density
Angle Shadow Y
Aspect Lock Shadow X
6.8.2 Creating a Group
To create a group, you must select two or more items on the card face, and use the group
command on the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.
6.8.3 Ungrouping a Group
To ungroup a group, you must select the required group, and use the ungroup command on
the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.
6.8.4 Editing Group Properties
Any changes made to the properties of a group will be applied to the relevant properties of its
constituent items.
Click here for more information on editing groups.
6.8.5 Resizing a Group
Groups cannot be resized.
6.9 Context Menus
Context menus are displayed by right clicking on an item.
Click on a link below to view the Context Menu associated with an item.
Single items - shapes, text group
Single items - line ruler
Single item - image card face
multiple items
6.9.1 Card Face
The card face context menu contains the following items:
1. Cut - cuts the selected page.
2. Copy - copies the selected page.
3. Paste - pastes the copied or cut page -only displayed when a page has been cut or
copied.
4. Delete - deletes the selected page.
5. Zoom in - click here.
6. Zoom out - click here.
7. Show Full Card Face- this causes the card face view to fill the entire page.
8. Help - displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected item(s).

6.9.2 Ruler
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 149
ID Card Designer
The Ruler context menu allows the units used by the selected card face to be set, and contains
the following items:
1. Inches,
2. Millimetres,
3. Centimetres,
4. Metres,
5. None - turns off the ruler.
6.9.3 Multiple Items
In addition to the Context Menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu contains:
1. Group - click here.
6.9.4 Group
In addition to the common menu contents, a context menu for a group item contains:
1. Ungroup - click here.
2. Test action – not used
6.9.5 Single Items
Context menu contains the following items:
1. Cut - cuts the selected item(s).
2. Copy - copies the selected item(s).
3. Paste - pastes the copied or cut item(s) -only displayed when a item has been copied.
4. Delete - deletes the selected item(s).
5. Test action – not used
6. Set action – not used
7. Align to Grid - click here.
8. Bring to Front - click here.
9. Send to Back - click here.
10. Help - displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected item(s).
6.9.6 Image
In addition to the Context Menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu for an image
item with an image assigned contains:
1. Restore Size - this function will restore the image to its original size if it has been
stretched or shrunk.
2. Restore Aspect - this function will restore the image to its correct aspect ratio at its
current size.
6.9.7 Line
In addition to the Context Menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu for a line
contains:
1. Align to axis - this will move the end point to make the line parallel with the horizontal
or vertical axis.

6.10 Common Items
6.10.1 Align to Grid
Selecting this option, from the View Menu or a Context Menu, will cause the selected item or
items to "jump" to the nearest grid line or dot.
A snap grid can be ignored by holding down the Shift key when placing an item.
The snap grid is controlled by the snap grid property of the selected card face.
6.10.2 Docking Items
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 150
ID Card Designer
By docking one item with another, many fields can be "stuck" or docked together - this can be
used to move around groups of items on the card designer.
Items can be docked to the right side and bottom of an object's boundary box. The position on
the side of the item at which the docking occurs is determined by the Anchor Property of the
item that is being docked.
The property set for the Vertical Alignment determines the position docking occurs on the left
side and Horizontal Alignment determines the position of the bottom side.
By default the vertical alignment is set to Top and horizontal alignment is set to Left.
Examples of the alignment properties are shown below. The yellow square is the item being
docked.
Anchor Properties
Left
Centre
Right
6.10.2.1 Docking Items
Top
Centre
Bottom
To dock items:
1. Moving an item so that its top left corner comes into contact with the top right hand
corner of another item, or
2. Moving an item so that the left side of its top comes into contact with the left side of the
bottom of another item.
A small box will appear when an item is successfully docked to another item. The position of
that box indicates what that item's alignment property is set to. The alignment examples above
show the position of the small confirmation box.
6.10.2.2 Docking Text Data Items
Text data items may change in size when previewed - items that are docked to a text data item
will move as that text item changes in size,
6.10.2.3 Moving Docked Items
When an item is moved only the items that are docked to it will move with it, not those it is

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 151
ID Card Designer
docked to. When an item is clicked with the primary mouse button and moved its boundary box
will turn blue.
6.10.2.4 Undocking items
For example, three items are docked together and the middle
item is moved, it (and the item docked to it) will be move away
from the item on the left.
To undock a item select it, and either:
1. Drag it away from the item it was docked to, or
2. Right click it and select Undock from the displayed menu (this field is only displayed
when the selected item is docked).
The selected item will be undocked from the object that it was docked to.
6.10.2.5 Preventing Docking
To move an item next to another, but not have it dock hold down the Ctrl key whilst moving it.
6.10.3 Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face
Red circle moved from Back to
front.
6.10.4 Zoom Function
An item's or group's order reflects its position in relation to other
items e.g. whether it is on top of, or beneath another item.
The order of an item can be changed using the Bring to Front
and Send to Back commands from:
1. the item's Context Menu.
2. the Edit Menu when the item is selected.
3. The Toolbar.
The zoom function is used to increase or reduce the magnification of a card face - zooming in
to see details and zooming out for a broader view, or,
Magnification Level
The level of magnification is displayed in the Status Bar.
Zooming
The card face view can be reduced or magnified by using:
1. The Zoom function of the View Menu, or
2. The Zoom in and Zoom out Toolbar buttons, or
3. The Zoom Toolbar button, or
4. Your mouse's mouse wheel (if present), or
5. The numeric pad keys + (plus) and -(minus) keys.
To view a full card face:
1. Click the Show Full card face button on the Toolbar, or
2. Select Show Full card face from the Zoom entry of the View Menu, or
3. Select the Show Full card face item from the card face's Context Menu.

6.10.5 Measurement
The units of measurement used by the ID-Card Designer are: Inches, Millimetres,
Centimetres, and Metres.
These options can be set from the Ruler Context Menu, the View Menu, or by the Card Face
Property Units.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 152
ID Card Designer

7. Alarm Map Designer
7.1 Introduction
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 153
Alarm Map Designer
The Alarm Map Designer is used to design maps that are displayed in the Alarm Viewer.
Alarm Point Tab, such as doors, areas and controller, that are placed on the map and used in
the Alarm Viewer Application to visually indicate the occurrence of alarm.
Typically, a map shows a schematic of the building(s) and has placed upon it alarm points in
the same location as their real world counterparts. A map can consist of many pages, that can
represent floors, different sites etc.
7.1.1 Starting Alarm Map Designer
To start this application:
By clicking on the Alarm Map Design icon (pictured left) in the Administration
Software's Toolbar, or selecting the entry Alarm Map Designer from the
Administration Software's Tools Menu.
7.1.2 Alarm Designer Interactive Map
Click here to see an interactive map of the Alarm Map Designer
7.1.3 Alarm Map Designer Layout
To find out more about a specific part of the Alarm Map Designer select one of the following:
Menu. Toolbar, General Tab, Page Tabs, Properties Region
7.1.4 Making a Map
Click here for more information on making maps.
7.2 Alarm Map Designer Glossary
Add Area
The Add Area is located on the left hand side of the Alarm Map Designer application. It contains
a list of drawing objects that are used to create shapes, text labels etc on the selected page,
and a list of configured areas and their associated alarm inputs which can on the page to build a
map, for example, of an area.
Alarm Area
An area that is associated with a 500 for alarm management. Alarm points, such as doors or
inputs, can be associated with alarm areas.
Alarm Point
Alarm points are items capable of generating alarms, for example, doors, inputs or controllers.
Child Area
A child area is an area that is contained by a parent area.
Context Menu
A menu that is displayed when an item is clicked with the secondary mouse button.
Parent Area
A parent area is an area that contains one or more areas within it.
Select
To select an item you must first enter select mode, by clicking the select mode icon in the
toolbar, or pressing the Select key.

7.3 Alarm Map Designer Interactive Map
Click an area on the map below to find out more about it:
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 154
Alarm Map Designer
For guidance on image formats and sizes of maps, click here.
Guidance on Image Formats and Sizes
Owing to the variety of ways in which alarm maps can be designed and used, it would be
impractical to apply any limits on the format and size of images used. However, it is
recommended that care be taken to use the minimum amount of bitmap images possible. The
administration software imposes no limits on image formats and sizes but tries to limit the
amount of bitmap data stored by resampling any images used.
Ideally bitmap images should only be used to denote item locations such as those used for
doors and alarm points. Wherever possible, use of vector graphics is preferable in order to
obtain the best performance and scalable system since the data sizes required are minimal
when compared to using raster graphics.
An additional benefit of using vector graphics is that they will look good at almost any zoom
factor due to their efficient image rescaling when using the zoom in and out feature.
Where only bitmap images are available for a facility, the best approach is to import these into
and then trace around the areas using the vector graphics features available in the Alarm Map
Designer.

7.4 Alarm Map Designer Menus
7.4.1 Design Menu
The File menu contains the following items:
New > New Page - Click here.
Import - Click here.
Export - Click here.
Update - Updates (saves) the current map. The map is stored within the database.
Exit- exits the Map Design Editor without saving changes.
7.4.2 Edit Menu
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 155
Alarm Map Designer
The Edit Menu contains the following items:
Cut - cuts the item(s) or page selected on the Main View. This function is also available in the
Toolbar.
Copy - copies the item(s) or page selected on the Main View. This function is also available in
the Toolbar.
Paste - pastes the item(s) or page that has been cut or copied. This function is also available in
the Toolbar.
Delete - deletes the item(s) or page selected This function is also available in the Toolbar.
Select All - selects all items on the page.
Page Properties - selecting this item will cause the Properties Region to display the properties
of the selected page.
Set Page Extent - makes the page slightly bigger than the objects that define its maximum
width and height.
Align to Grid - click here.
Bring to Front - click here.
Send to Back - here.
Group Items - groups the selected items. Click here for more information.
Ungroup Items - ungroups the selected group. Click here for more information.
7.4.3 View Menu
The menu contains the following items:
Units - selects the scale used by the Ruler. The scale can also be changed by the Ruler
Context Menu.
Zoom - Displays a submenu which allows you to change the page Zoom level.
Animation - this item toggles the animation state of any animated icons or graphics on the
page.
Small Icons - this item toggles between small and large icon states any area and alarm items
states present on the page.
7.4.4 Help Menu
Selecting the item Contents displays the Alarm Map Designer helpfile.

7.5 Alarm Map Designer Toolbar
The toolbar contains the following items:
Select
Zoom
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
Zoom in
Zoom out
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 156
Alarm Map Designer
Enables select mode, which is used to select single or multiple items on the
page. Click here for more information.
Allows the user to zoom in and zoom out on the page view by using mouse
buttons, keys or the mouse wheel. Click here for more information.
Cut the selected item or page. This function is also available in the Edit
Menu.
Copy the selected item or page. This function is also available in the Edit
Menu.
Paste the item or page which has been cut or copied. This function is also
available in the Edit Menu.
Delete the selected item or page. This function is also available in the Edit
Menu.
Increase the magnification of the page. Click here for more information.
Decrease the magnification of the page. Click here for more information.
Decrease the magnification so that the full page will be displayed. This
Show Full Page
function is also available in the View Menu.
Sends the selected item to the front of the page - click here for more
Bring to Front
information.
Sends the selected item to the back of the page - click here for more
Send to Back
information.
Group
Groups the selected items. Click here for more information.
Ungroups the selected group. Click here for more information.
Ungroup Items
7.6 Add Items Region
7.6.1 General Tab
This tab contains six items that are used to draw and create maps on the selected page.
Shape Item
Image Item
Line Item
Text Item
View Item
This is used to create shapes on the page - shapes supported are: circle,
square, triangle, star, pentagon, hexagon or a burst. When drawing shapes
a circle is drawn by default and can be changed using it's Shape Properties.
Click here to view a shape item's properties.
This is used to create frames on the page which display the image file
specified in its Image Property.
Click here to view an image item's properties.
This is used to create lines on the page whose thickness is specified
Click here to view its properties.
This is used to create a box on the page that displays the text specified by
its Text Properties.
Click here to view its properties.
A view item defines a rectangular region on the map, that once configured,
will be displayed in the page view when the item associated with it is double
li k d th T t A ti f ti i d

Button Item
clicked, or the Test Action function is used.
Click here to view its properties.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 157
Alarm Map Designer
A button is used to link to another item or page in the Alarm Map Designer.
Clicking this item after its action property has been configured will cause the
item to which is linked to be displayed.
Click here to view its properties.
Click here for further information on the Add Items region.
7.6.2 Areas Tab
The Areas tab contains alarm areas that have been configured In the administration software.
Each area can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the location and
status of the area in the Alarm Viewer.
Alarm Areas
An alarm area is used to signal that at least one alarm point in the
area has not been cleared (i.e. not been restored and/or
acknowledged). Click here for more information.
Click here to view an alarm area properties.
Click here for further information on the Add Items region.
7.6.3 Inputs Tab
The Inputs tab contains inputs that have been configured In the administration software.
The inputs can be filtered by selected an area from the drop-down list:
The default is inputs in all areas.
Each input can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the location and
status of the input in the Alarm Viewer.
An input is an alarm point used to signal the
occurrence of an alarm. Click here for more
Inputs information.
Click here to view alarm point properties.
Click here for further information on the Add Items region.
7.6.4 Outputs Tab
The Outputs tab contains outputs that have been configured In the administration software.
The outputs can be filtered by selected an area from the drop-down list:
The default is outputs in all areas.
Each output can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the location and
status of the output in the Alarm Viewer.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 158
Alarm Map Designer
Outputs
An output is a relay used to activate a sounder or reset an alarm
sensor. Alternatively, an output can also be configured to be set
manually or when an area is armed. Click here for more information.
Click here to view output properties.
Click here for further information on the Add Items region.
7.6.5 CCTV Tab
This tab is only displayed if a video source has been defined.
This CCTV tab contains a list of configured video sources, which are used to represent
cameras, or display the feed from a camera on the selected page.
Video
Sources
Once it is placed upon the page this item has two modes of behaviour
that depend upon its Display Mode property.
Click here to view an video source properties.
Click here for further information on the Add Items region.
7.6.6 Alarm Points Tab
The Alarm Points tab contains alarm items that have been configured in administration
software. Alarm points are configured by specifying an alarm area in the Alarm Management
tab of servers, controllers, and doors.
The alarm points can be filtered by selected an area from the drop-down list:
The default is alarm points in all areas.
Each alarm point can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the location
and status of the alarm item in the Alarm Viewer.
Servers
Controllers A server, controller, or door is an alarm point used to signal the
occurrence of an alarm. Click here for more information.
Click here to view alarm point properties.
Doors
Click here for further information on the Add Items region.
7.6.7 Further information on the Add Items Region
7.6.7.1 Changing Add Items Views
The Add Items region (except for the General and Areas tabs) can be filtered by selecting an
area from a drop-down list in the Add Items box.
In addition, right clicking on the region give the following options:
Show all iems - shows all items (not applicable to General tab).
Show items not on current page - shows only the items not on the current page (not
applicable to General tab)..
Large icons – toggles between large and small icons.

7.6.7.2 Drawing and Creating Maps
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 159
Alarm Map Designer
Click here for more information on using any of the above items to draw and create maps with.
7.6.7.3 Map Design Overview
Click here.
7.7 Design Editor Region
7.7.1 Design Editor Region Introduction
7.7.1.1 Adding / Deleting Map Pages
Click here for more information
7.7.1.2 Drawing and Placing Items
Click here for more information on drawing and creating maps.
7.7.1.3 Editing Map Designs
Select Mode
Select mode is used to edit map designs.
Click here for more information.
Moving, resizing and deleting
Click here for more information.
Grouping and ungrouping
Context Menus
Merge many items into one item, or Context menus are used to edit items.
breakdown a group into its constituent parts.
Click here for more information.
Viewing Properties
Click here for more information.
Rulers and Measurement
Click here for more information.
7.7.1.4 Properties
Aligning items to the Grid
Click here for information.
Ordering items on a page
Click here for more information.
Click here for more information on editing the properties of a page or an item on the page.
7.7.1.5 Map Making Hints
Click here to view hints on making maps.
7.7.2 Map Making and Editing
7.7.2.1 Map Making Hints
Text or Picture Button
You can use a Text Item or an image item on your map as a "button". Pressing the button will
zoom to another part of the map, or another page. To do this
1. Add a text or bitmap item to the page
2. Adjust its properties to a suitable appearance, then, in the view property put the name
of a page, or alarm area or preset view object.
3. Click here.
Icon Size
Alarm points and alarm areas have icons associated with them whose size can be toggled
between large (32 pixels) or small (16 pixels) using the View Menu to set the Small Icons
value.
Action
In the Alarm Viewer Application the operator can select an active alarm, an alarm area or

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 160
Alarm Map Designer
alarm point, and all of the Alarm Viewer Application panel's will highlight the selected item.
When an alarm occurs the map must show the alarm to the operator immediately. This means
that the map view must be able to jump to any alarm point or area automatically and display it
to the user. This "zoom-to" behaviour can be set up and tested in the map editor.
To jump to an object - double click it, or right click and select Test Action from the Context
Menu.
When you jump to an object it tries to fill the screen with the item specified in the view property.
This can be the name of a page, a view, or an alarm area. if the item is rotated the view will also
rotate so the item appears "right way up".
Normally the view for an alarm area is the area itself. This behaviour can be changed by
altering the action property of the alarm area, or by adding a view with the same name.
Normally the view for an alarm point is the parent area, so using the Action Property function
on the alarm point will fill the screen with its parent area (even if that area has a different view
specified). However, if the alarm point is outside the rectangle specified for the alarm area it
may not be visible, and you need to specify the name of a different page, view or area in the
view property of the alarm point.
View items can be added to the map - but they must have a name specified before they can be
used. View items are not visible in the alarm viewer - but in the map designer you see an icon
and name.
If a view has the same name as an alarm area the view will be chosen by objects that specify
that name in their view property.
There may be alarm areas and views with the same name on different pages. If there is a view
or area available on the current page with the specified name, then that one is chosen.
Otherwise all pages are searched and the Action may change to a different page.
Overriding the Area with a View
The icon for an alarm area can be placed in any of the 9 anchor positions by adjusting the
Anchor property, but you can place the icon somewhere else if you need to.
1. Add a view item to specify the rectangle of the alarm area.
2. Give that view the same name as the area.
3. Move the area rectangle so the icon appears in the desired location. Now the icon will
be where you want it, but zooming to the area or any of its alarm points will fill the
screen with the rectangle specified by the view instead of the area.
7.7.2.2 Adding/Deleting/Copying Pages
Adding Pages
To add a blank page to the current design, select New > New Page from the Design Menu.
To copy an existing page, click on the required page tab, copy it and paste it.
After a page is added, a new tab will be added to the Pages Tab area.
Deleting Pages
To delete a page select it by clicking the appropriate tab, and select the delete function from the
Toolbar or Edit Menu.
Copying Pages
To copy an existing page, right click the tab of the page to be copied required page tab, and
copy it and paste it using the either the Toolbar or Edit Menu.
7.7.2.3 Alarm Viewer and Map Design Editor
The Alarm Viewer is used in the management of alarms - if maps are present it will display
them in a viewer. If an alarm point goes into alarm, the appearance of that alarm point on the
map will change to indicate that it has gone into alarm, and the map viewer will zoom to the
area associated with that alarm point, so that it fills the map view.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 161
Alarm Map Designer
Alarm Point Appearance
The appearance of an alarm point is modified by the Alarm Viewer to indicate the state of that
alarm point, i.e. whether it has been disarmed, armed etc.
An alarm point's Alarm Status property can be used to view how an alarm point will appear in a
different states in the Alarm Viewer.
Associated Areas
When an operator configures alarm points he or she associates them with an alarm area.
This feature can be used in the Map Design Editor: double clicking an alarm point, or selecting
the Test Action entry from the items Context Menu, will cause the page to jump to that
associated area, so that it fills the page view.
Action
Zoom to can be configured for any item in the Map Design Editor. Click here for more
information.
7.7.2.4 Editing Properties
The properties of all pages and items in the Map Design Editors define their appearance and
behaviour on the page and in the Alarm Viewer Application. Changes to the properties of
anything within the Map Design Editor will be instantly reflected on the page.
Item Properties
To edit the properties of an item on the page: select the required item and the Properties
Region will display that items properties allowing them to be edited.
Page Properties
To view and edit the properties of the selected page select Page Properties from the View
Menu.
7.7.2.5 Page Tabs
The page area is used to design maps: items from the Add Items and Alarm Points placed here
and are shown in the Alarm Viewer.
Additional pages can be added using the New Page command, located in the design menu.
The page name, displayed in the tab, is entered in the page's name property.
Selecting Pages
Additional pages are selected using the page tabs, which are located above the page area.
Page Coordinates
The coordinates of the mouse pointer on the page are displayed in the Status Bar.
Page Properties
The page has the following properties:
Name Units
Tool tip Background Colour
X Background Image
Y Snap grid
Width Snap grid size
Height Snap grid colour
Resolution
Rulers
The rulers on the map area can have their units changed from:
1. the View Menu, or

2. the units property of the Page Properties, or
3. the rulers Context Menu.
Viewing Page Properties
To view the page properties, select it by
1. Clicking on any empty area of the page, or
2. Select the Page Properties entry from the Edit Menu
Editing Page Properties
Click here for more information.
7.7.2.6 Group Item
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 162
Alarm Map Designer
A group item is two or more items that have been grouped using the group command. A group
item has the following properties:
Name Transparency
X Shadow
Y Shadow Y
Anchor Density
Angle Shadow X
Aspect Lock
Creating a Group
To create a group, you must select two or more items on the page, and use the group
command on the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.
Ungrouping a Group
To ungroup a group, you must select the required group, and use the ungroup command on
the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.
Editing Group Properties
Any changes made to the properties of a group will be applied to the relevant properties of its
constituent items.
Click here for more information on editing groups.
Resizing a Group
Groups cannot be resized.
7.7.2.7 Grouping and Ungrouping
When the Group command is applied to two or more selected objects, they will behave as if
they are a single item - clicking on a constituent item will cause the group to be selected, and
clicking and dragging a single item will cause all of them to move.
Grouping Items
To group items:
1. Enter Select Mode.
2. Select the required items.
3. Select the group command from any of the following locations: Edit Menu, Toolbar or
the Context Menu of the selected group.
Ungrouping a Group
To ungroup a group and return it to its constituent components, select it and then use the
ungroup command from any of the following locations: Edit Menu, Toolbar or the Context
Menu of the selected group

Resizing Groups
Groups cannot be resized.
7.7.2.8 Select Mode
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 163
Alarm Map Designer
Before any item can be moved, resized, group / ungroups or deleted select mode must be
entered.
To enter select mode click the select item from the Toolbar or click the ESC key.
Note: The current mode of the Map Design Editor is displayed in the Status Bar.
Selecting Items
When an item or group is selected, its properties will be displayed in the Properties Region.
To select multiple items either:
1. Hold the Shift key down and select the required item.
2. Select a blank part of the page and then dragging will cause a selection area to
appear. Any items that fall within the selection area will become selected.
Note: Holding the Ctrl key and clicking a selected item will unselect it.
Select All
To select all items on the page, use the select all function by:
1. Selecting the item Select All on the Edit Menu.
2. Holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the key 'A'
Properties
Selecting any item on the page will cause the Properties Region to display the properties of that
item.
7.7.2.9 Move/Resize/Delete Items
This page describes how to perform the listed actions on single items, multiple items or
groups, after entering Select Mode.
1. Move,
2. Resize, or
3. Delete.
Moving
Select an item or group and drag to move it around. Release the button to stop moving it.
Resizing
After an item has been selected it is enclosed by a rectangular boundary
box that has on each side and corner grab handles.
Solid black grab handles (pictured left top) indicate that the item or group can
be resized by click and drag. Outlined grab handles in each corner (pictured
left bottom) indicate the item cannot be resized by click and drag.
Items with their Aspect Lock Property set to on, have grab handles in the
middle of each side (picture bottom left), and maintain their aspect ratio when
resized.
Notes:
Groups cannot be resized.
The size of a Text Item can only be adjusted with the Font Property.
Deleting
Items or groups can be deleted from the page by:

1. Selecting the delete option from its Context Menu, or
2. Selecting it and pressing in the Delete key, or
3. Selecting and dragging it off the main view and releasing the button, or
4. Using the delete function button on the Toolbar, or the edit menu.
7.7.2.10 Drawing and Placing Items
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 164
Alarm Map Designer
Items from the General Tab, Alarm Points Tab and CCTV Tab can be placed on the selected
page by using two different methods:
1. Dragging and dropping.
2. Selecting and clicking.
Dragging and Dropping
Any item from the Add Items Region Tabs can be placed on the selected page by selecting the
item and dragging it to the required location on the page while holding down the mouse button.
Selecting and Clicking
Items can be placed on the selected page by selecting it, and then clicking on the required area
to place it. How an item is placed is dependant upon whether it is a fixed shape item, variable
shape item or line.
Fixed Shape Items
Fixed shape items (indicated above) are items that when placed have a predetermined size,
which cannot be changed. However, Text items' sizes can be adjusted by using the Font
Property.
To place a fixed shape item select it and click the required area on the page to place it.
Variable Shape Items
Variable shape items (indicated above) are items whose rectangular size is determined on by
clicking twice on the page: the first click specifies the location of the item’s top left corner and
the second click specifies the location of the bottom right corner.
Line
Lines can be placed in two ways: individually or many.
Individually: After selecting the line item, selecting the page defines the line's start point and
releasing it defines its end point.
Many: Selecting the page will specify a line's start point and clicking a second time will specify
its end point, causing that line to be drawn, clicking a third time will specify the end point of the
next line - the end point of the previous line is start of the current line.
To end drawing press the Esc key or click the Toolbar's select function.

7.7.3 Context Menus
Context menus are menus that are displayed by right clicking on an item.
Click on a link below to view the context menu associated with an item.
Single items - shapes, text, views, group
alarm point, alarm area
Single items - line ruler
Single item - image page
multiple items
7.7.3.1 Multiple Items
In addition to the context menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu contains:
1. Group - click here.
7.7.3.2 Page
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 165
Alarm Map Designer
The page context menu contains the following items:
1. Cut - cuts the selected page.
2. Copy - copies the selected page.
3. Paste - pastes the copied or cut page -only displayed when a page has been cut or
copied.
4. Delete - deletes the selected page.
5. Zoom in - click here.
6. Zoom out - click here.
7. Show Full Page - this causes the page view with to show the entire page.
8. Help - displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected item(s).
7.7.3.3 Ruler
The Ruler context menu allows the units used by the current page to be set, and contains the
following items:
1. Inches,
2. Millimetres,
3. Centimetres,
4. Metres,
5. None - turns of the ruler, e.g. for "not to scale diagrams").
7.7.3.4 Group
In addition to the common menu contents, a context menu for a group item contains:
1. Ungroup - click here.
7.7.3.5 Single Items
Context menu contains the following items:
1. Cut - cuts the selected item(s).
2. Copy - copies the selected item(s).
3. Paste - pastes the copied or cut item(s) -only displayed when a item has been copied.
4. Delete - deletes the selected item(s).

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 166
Alarm Map Designer
5. Test Action - tests the an item's action property. Click here.
6. Set Action - a sub menu that contains items present in the design that can be linked to
the selected item. Click here.
7. Align to Grid - click here.
8. Bring to Front - click here.
9. Send to Back - click here.
10. Help - displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected item(s).
7.7.3.6 Image
In addition to the context menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu for an image item
with an image assigned contains:
1. Restore Size - this function will restore the image to its original size if it has been
stretched or shrunk.
2. Restore Aspect - this function will restore the image to its correct aspect ratio at its
current size.
7.7.3.7 Line
In addition to the context menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu for a line
contains:
1. Align to axis - this will move the end point to make the line parallel with the horizontal
or vertical axis.
7.8 Properties Region
7.8.1 Item Properties
7.8.1.1 Multiple Item Properties
When multiple items are selected on the page, the Properties Region displays a set of
properties common to all of the selected items. When these common properties are edited, the
respective property for each item will be changed as well.
When two or more items are selected the following properties are displayed:
The following properties are displayed when multiple items are selected:
Anchor Shadow
Angle Density
Aspect Lock Shadow X
Transparency Shadow Y
Editing the Item's Properties
Click here for more information.
7.8.1.2 Group Item Properties
A group item is two or more items that have been grouped using the group command. A group
item has the following properties:
Name Transparency
X Shadow
Y Density
Anchor Shadow X
Angle Shadow Y
Aspect Lock

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 167
Alarm Map Designer
Creating a Group
To create a group, you must select two or more items on the page, and use the group
command on the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.
Ungrouping a Group
To ungroup a group, you must select the required group, and use the ungroup command on
the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.
Editing Group Properties
Any changes made to the properties of a group will be applied to the relevant properties of its
constituent items.
Click here for more information on editing groups.
Resizing a Group
Groups cannot be resized.
7.8.1.3 Shape Item Properties
A shape selected on a page has the following properties:
Name Shape
X Border Colour
Y Fill Colour
Width Line Width
Height Shadow
Aspect Lock Density
Anchor Shadow X
Angle Shadow Y
Transparency
Editing the Item's Properties
Click here for more information.
7.8.1.4 Image Item Properties
An image item has the following properties:
Name Angle
X Image
Y Transparency
Width Shadow
Height Density
Aspect Lock Shadow X
Anchor Shadow Y
Editing the Item's Properties
Click here for more information.

7.8.1.5 Line Item Properties
A line has the following properties:
Name Colour
X Line Width
Y Shadow
Width Density
Height Shadow X
Anchor Shadow Y
Transparency
Aligning to Axis
A line can be aligned to the closest axis (straightened) by selecting Align to Axis from the
Context Menu.
Editing the Item's Properties
Click here for more information.
7.8.1.6 Text Item Properties
A text item selected on a page has the following properties:
Name Font
X Multi-line
Y Colour
Anchor Shadow
Angle Density
Transparency Shadow X
Text Shadow Y
Editing the Item's Properties
Click here for more information.
7.8.1.7 View Item Properties
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 168
Alarm Map Designer
A view item is used in conjunction with Set Action to enable an alarm point to be linked to an
area on the map, i.e. when the alarm point is double clicked the linked view is displayed.
A view item has the following properties:
Name Angle
X Anchor
Y
Editing the Item's Properties
Click here for more information.

7.8.1.8 Button Item Properties
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 169
Alarm Map Designer
A button item is used in conjunction with Set Action to enable the button to be linked to an area
on the map, i.e. when the button is double clicked the linked view is displayed.
A button item selected on a page has the following properties:
Name Colour
Tool tip Image
Action Common Icon
X Shadow
Y Density
Anchor Shadow X
Angle Shadow Y
Font
Editing the Item's Properties
Click here for more information.
7.8.1.9 Alarm Area Properties
An alarm area has the following properties:
Name Font
Action Colour
X Shadow
Y Density
Width Shadow X
Height Shadow Y
Anchor
Angle
Editing the Item's Properties
Click here for more information.
7.8.1.10 Alarm Point/Output Properties
An alarm point/output has the following properties:
Name Colour
Action Shadow
X Density
Y Shadow X
Anchor Shadow Y
Angle
Font
Editing the Item's Properties
Click here for more information.

7.8.1.11 Video Source Properties
A video source item selected on a page has the following properties:
Name Font
X Colour
Y Shadow
Anchor Density
Angle Shadow X
Display Mode Shadow Y
Editing the Item's Properties
Click here for more information.
7.8.2 Individual Properties
7.8.2.1 Name Property
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 170
Alarm Map Designer
The name of item. This is not an essential property, unless the item selected is a view which
you intend to link through other items, and is only required when configuring the Action
Property.
7.8.2.2 Tool tip Property
This is only applicable to page and button items. Text entered for a page is displayed when the
mouse is held over the page tab in the Alarm Viewer. Text entered for a button is displayed
when the mouse is held over the button in the Alarm Viewer.
7.8.2.3 Action and Set Action
Action is a property that allows one item to be linked to another. Double clicking on the item
will display the linked item (e.g. display Page 2).
Setting an Item's Action property
An item's action property can be set by:
1. Selecting the item that you wish to link it to from the Set Action entry of its Context
Menu .The name of the selected item is automatically entered into the select items
Action Property, or
2. Entering the Name (defined in the Name Property) of the item you wish to link to in its
Action Property.
Testing an Item's Action Property
To test if an items action property is correctly configured:
1. Select from its Context Menu the entry Test Action, or
2. Double click it
If it is correctly configured the item to which is linked will be displayed in the page area.
7.8.2.4 X, Y, Height and Width Properties
X
The distance, in the selected units, of the item's origin from the left side of the page. The origin
location is set using the item's Anchor Property.
Y
The distance, in the selected units, of the item's origin the item from the top of the page. The
origin location is set using the item's Anchor Property.
Width
The width of the object, in the selected units.

Height
The height of the object, in the selected units.
7.8.2.5 Resolution and Units Properties
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 171
Alarm Map Designer
Resolution
Controls how detailed an object can be drawn on a page. The higher the value, the more
detailed a feature can be and the more you can zoom in. This value, represents the number of
pixels per selected unit within the page.
Specifically affects bitmap images, causing them to be resampled so that their resolution is not
higher than the resolution of the page.
Also, with fonts and lines, whose size is specified in pixels.
Units
Allows the user to select the units that the page is displaying values in. Click here.
7.8.2.6 Background Properties
Background Colour
Click the button on right hand side to display the colour picker that selects the page's
background colour.
Background image
Click the button on right hand side to display the Open File dialog. This will allow you to
navigate to, and select a graphic file, which will be displayed on the map's selected side. The
file formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, TIF and WMF are supported.
To remove the image select its property again and press the Delete key.
7.8.2.7 Aspect Lock Property
The Aspect Lock Property determines how a shape changes when it is resized using the
mouse.
7.8.2.8 Anchor and Angle Property
Anchor
Aspect Lock Off
Object's right side is clicked and dragged.
Note how the grab handles' position differ from the Aspect Lock
On setting.
Aspect Lock On - item retains aspect ratio when resized.
Object's right side is clicked and dragged.
Note how the grab handles' position differs from the Aspect Lock
Off setting.
The Anchor Property controls where, in the selected item, its origin is located. The origin is
the point which it rotates and scales around, and whose location determines the shape's X
and Y coordinate properties. For View and Alarm Area items, this property determines the
location of their icons within their boundary frame.

top left
left
bottom left
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 172
top
centre
bottom
Alarm Map Designer
top right
right
bottom right
The image below shows examples of how the alignment properties affect an item when it is
rotated 45 degrees clockwise . The red dot indicates the shape's origin.
Horizontal alignment: centre
Vertical alignment: centre
Horizontal alignment: right
Vertical alignment: bottom
Horizontal alignment: left
Vertical alignment: centre
Angle
Entering a value will rotate the shape around its origin. A positive value will rotate the item
clockwise, and a negative anticlockwise.
7.8.2.9 Display Mode
This property toggles the selected video source's behaviour on the page.
Setting the value to icon will change the video source item to a camera icon.
Setting the value to image will change the video source item to a rectangular, live video feed
from that video source, which can then be resized as required.
7.8.2.10 Transparency Property
A value between 0 (opaque) and 100 (transparent).
7.8.2.11 Text Property
Text entered here will be displayed in the text item on the page.
7.8.2.12 Font Property
This property controls the appearance of the text in the selected item.
Clicking the button on the right hand side displays the font editor, that is used to select font
type, font style, font size, font effect and scripting.
7.8.2.13 Multi-line Property
This property allows a text item to be wrap round on more than one line (e.g. when specified as
ON, a long piece of text can be adjusted by altering its width).
7.8.2.14 Colour Property
Colour Property
Sets the colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will
display a colour selector.
Fill Colour Property

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 173
Alarm Map Designer
Sets the fill colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will
display a colour selector.
7.8.2.15 Line Width Property
This property sets the line thickness of the selected:
1. line (for lines), or
2. boundary (for shapes).
The default value is 1. Setting this value to 0 will turn the line off.
7.8.2.16 Image Property
This property is used to choose the image file that an item displays.
If the image property is specified as a background image for a page, it will expand to fill the
page, and cannot be resized.
If the image property is specified as an image for an image item, the image will be sized to fit
the image frame, and may therefore appear distorted. An image can be adjusted by using the
image items Context Menu.
Click the button on right hand side to display the Open File dialog. This will allow you to
navigate to, and select a graphic file, which will be displayed within the boundary box of the
image item. The file formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, TIF and WMF are supported.
Removing an Image
To remove an image from a page background or from an image item without deleting it (i.e.
leaving an empty frame), select the image property and press the Delete key.
7.8.2.17 Shadow, Shadow X, Shadow Y and Shadow Density
Shadow
Toggles shadow visibility.
Shadow X
The horizontal offset of a shadow. A positive value will cause the shadow to be displayed to the
right of the item.
Shadow Y
The vertical offset of a shadow. A positive value will cause the shadow to be displayed below
the item.
Shadow Density
The darkness of the shadow: 0 will make it invisible, and a value of 100 makes it black. By
default this value is set to 20 (light gray).
7.8.2.18 Snap Grid, Snap Grid Size, Snap Grid Colour
Snap Grid
There are three options associated with this property:
1. No snap grid - no grid / dots displayed. This option disables the "snap to" when placing
items.
2. Grid - displays a grid on the page.
3. Dots - displays dots on the page.
Snap Grid Size
Sets the scale used by the displayed grid / dots in the units specified in the Units Properties.
Snap Grid Colour
Sets the colour of the grid. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will display a
colour selector.

7.9 Status Bar
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 174
Alarm Map Designer
The status bar, located at the bottom of the Alarm Map Designer application, displays the
following information :
1. X and Y coordinates of the mouse pointer, in the selected units for the page.
2. Mode Selected - the icon displayed here reflects the item that has been selected in the
Add Area or Toolbar. For example it displays a picture of magnifying glass and the word
"zoom" if zoom mode is selected, a shape icon and the word "shape" if shapes are
selected etc.
3. Operator Name - the name of the operator currently logged on.
4. Zoom Level - the current level of magnification.

8. Alarm Viewer
8.1 Introduction
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 175
Alarm Viewer
The Alarm Viewer application is used to monitor and manage alarms that occur on your
Administration Software administered access control system.
Alarms occur when Alarm Points are triggered. Alarm points are items capable of generating
alarm events, and take the form of inputs, doors, controllers or 500s.
When an alarm occurs the Alarm Viewer will:
1. Sound an alarm (if defined)
2. Highlight the Alarm Point or its associated Alarm Area in the tab selected in the Alarm
/ Areas Board.
3. Display information about it in the active alarms window.
4. Highlight its location in the Map Region (if maps are present).
Alarm Viewer Components
Three components are always present:
1. Alarm/Event Region that includes three tabs: Active Alarms, Event Log Viewer and Alarm
History.
2. Areas Board.
3. Alarm Board.
Two other optional components are:
1. Map Region.
2. CCTV Region.
8.2 Alarm Viewer Glossary
Alarm Areas
An area that is associated with a 500 for alarm management. Alarm points, such as doors or
inputs, can be associated with alarm areas.
Alarm Point
An alarm point is a input, door, controller or a 500 that has been associated with an area, and is
capable of generating alarm events.
Alarm Sensor Resets
An alarm sensor reset is a relay that is used to reset the condition of inputs associated with an
area.
Area Sounders
An area sounders is a relay that is activated when the area it is associated with goes into alarm.
Area sounders are connected to devices that signal when an alarm has occurred, for example
an alarm bell.
Child area
A child area is an area that is contained by a parent area.
Disarm Privilege
A disarm privilege is assigned to an access group. When that access group is applied to a
keyholder, it will give the keyholder the ability to disarm any armed area associated with that
access group.
Parent Area
A parent area is an area that contains one or more areas within it.

8.3 Interactive Map
Click on a region of the map for further information.
The tab order and/or their regions can be moved about the screen by dragging and dropping
the tab (see Tear Off Controls). Click here for an example.
Example of regions moved about the screen:
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 176
Alarm Viewer

Tear Off Controls
To enable tear off controls, select View > Windows > Enable Tear Off.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 177
Alarm Viewer
To undock the Event Log, a Report or an Alarm Viewer Region, select the tab or icon and
drag and drop at its required position. The Event Log also has an Undock icon in the toolbar. A
tear off confirmation window will be displayed if the facility has not been disabled.
The undocked window has standard Windows minimise, maximise, and resize facilities but only
windows that can be closed have the icon in the tab.
To move an undocked window, select the title bar or tab and drag and drop at its required
position. Docking is suppressed when the title bar is used or the Ctrl or Shift key is pressed
when the tab is used.
To dock the Event Log, Report or Alarm Viewer Region, select the tab and drag and drop at its
required docked position or select the icon . The Event Log also has a Dock icon in the
toolbar A tear off confirmation window will be displayed if the facility has not been disabled.
To disable tear off controls, select View > Windows > Disable Tear Off.
Tear Off Confirmation Window
A tear off confirmation window will be
displayed when attempting to dock or undock
a window.
To disable the facility, select the Do not show this message again checkbox.
To confirm, select the OK button.
To cancel, select the Cancel button.
To display help information, select the Help button.
To enable this facility, select View > Windows > Show all tear off tips.
8.4 Alarm Viewer Menus
8.4.1 File Menu
Close - closes the Alarm Viewer.
PC Sounder - selecting this item mutes the PC sounder (there is an identical function in the
Alarm Viewer Toolbar).
Acknowledge All - selecting this item will display the Acknowledge Alarm window.
Silence All - selecting the function will display the Silence All window.
8.4.2 View Menu
Refresh - refreshes the Alarm Viewer.
Show Text on Toolbar Buttons - toggles the appearance of descriptive text on all toolbar
buttons in the Alarm Viewer.
Muster Report (only if a muster event to action has been specified) - displays the Muster
Report.
Windows – has several options:
Restore Panes – displays all tabs and restores undocked windows back to their default
position.
Show all tear off tips – Enables tips to be displayed when attempting to use the tear off
facility.
Don’t show tear off tips – Disables the tear off tip.

Enable/Disable Tearoff – toggles the tear off facility. If disabled, any undocked windows
can be moved but not docked.
Tech Support Mode – toggles between default windows settings and customised
windows settings.
A list of windows that can be brought to the front when selected.
Visual Notification – selecting this item will display the Visual Notification window.
8.4.3 Visual Notification
Visual notification is designed to display an image of the person who is entering a particularly
sensitive area. When a key is presented to a reader that has been specified for visual
notification, an image of the person is displayed and the operator can ensure that the person
attempting to enter the area is the valid keyholder.
Note
The door giving access to the area must have an area assigned in its Alarm
Management tab.
To specify a reader for visual notification:
1. Display the Alarm Viewer.
2. Select View > Visual Notification and the
Visual Notification window is displayed.
3. Select the readers that require visual
notification.
4. Select to close the window.
To verify the identity of the keyholder:
1. A person presents a key to a reader and
the Visual Verification window is
displayed.
2. If the person is recognised as the valid
keyholder from the displayed image,
select Open to allow entry.
If the person is not recognised, take the
appropriate action (e.g. notify security).
3. Select to close the window.
8.4.4 Active Alarms / Event Log / Alarm History Menu
The menu title depends on the tab currently selected.
Start Automatic Updates - starts automatic updating of the list.
Pause Automatic Updated - stops automatic updating of the list.
Acknowledge Alarm - acknowledges the selected event/alarm (not applicable to Alarm
History list).
Show details for item - displays details of the appropriate item.
8.4.5 Alarm Board Menu
The Alarm Boards Menu is used to select small or large icons.
If an item in the Alarms Boards tab is selected, different options are displayed depending on
the type of item selected.
8.4.6 Areas Menu
The Areas Menu is used to select small or large icons.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 178
Alarm Viewer

If an area in the Areas tab is selected, area options are displayed.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 179
Alarm Viewer

8.4.7 Map Menu
The map menu will be displayed if one or more maps exist.
Small Icons / Large Icons - toggles the icon sizes on the map viewer.
Zoom In - enlarges the selected map.
Zoom Out - shrinks the select map.
100% - shows the full map.
Zoom to fit - zooms to the selected item on the map.
8.4.8 CCTV Menu
The CCTV menu will be displayed if one or more video sources exist.
Select –selects a video source.
Enable – enables a video source to be viewed in the CCTV region.
Expand name / Norman Operation – expands the selected video source or redisplays the
normal view.
Show Names – toggles the display of the video source name(s) in the CCTV region.
Connect – connects the video source(s) in the CCTV region.
Save Image – saves the selected video source image in the My Pictures folder with an
automatically-generated name that includes the camera name and date and time.
Save Image As – saves the selected video source image in a specified folder with a specified
name.
Save Image as Incident Report – displays the Incident Report Details window which allows
the image to be saved with a comment and a checkbox to display the incident after creation.
After a CCTV image has been saved, the Incident Report Saved Successfully window is
displayed.
When the html file is displayed it includes the Incident Date, Frame Time, Site Name, Camera
Name, and Comments.
8.4.9 Incident Report Details
To save an CCTV image of an incident:
1. Display the Alarm Viewer.
2. Select CCTV > Save Image as
Incident Report and the Incident
Report Details Window is
displayed.
3. Specify the location and names of
an image file and html file and enter
a comment. The default names
include the date and time.
4. If the html file is to be displayed
immediately, select the Show
Incident Report in browser after
creation checkbox.
5. Select the OK button.
After a CCTV image has been saved,
the Incident Report Saved
Successfully window is displayed,
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 180
Alarm Viewer

Incident Report Saved Successfully window
After a CCTV image has been saved, the
Incident Report Saved Successfully window
is displayed.
To navigates to where the image is stored:
• Select the Browse button.
To display the image file:
• Select the Open button.
To send the image files via Email
1. Select the Send button and the CCTV
Email window is displayed.
2. Enter the recipient details.
Select the Send button.
8.4.10 Context Menu
The context menu is displayed by right clicking on one or more alarms. This menu contains
displays the same options as the Toolbar plus: Show Details of selected alarm.
8.5 Alarm Viewer Toolbars
8.5.1 Alarm Viewer Toolbar
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Refresh This button refreshes the Alarm Viewer application.
PC Sounder Click here for more information.
Silence all.. Click here for more information.
Acknowledge all.. Click here for more information.
All Organisations
8.5.2 Active Alarm Toolbar
The active alarm list has the following toolbar:
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 181
A list of organisational units that are available for
filtering. The default is all organisational units.
The Play icon refreshes the active alarm list automatically when a new alarm
occurs.
The Pause icon prevents the active alarm list being updated when a new alarm
occurs.
The Acknowledge Alarm icon acknowledges the selected alarm. Click here for
more information.
Alarm Viewer

8.5.3 Event Log Viewer Toolbar
The event log viewer has the following toolbar:
The Play icon refreshes the event log automatically when a new event occurs.
The Pause icon prevents the event log being updated when a new event occurs.
The Controller Time icon displays the data and time based on either controller or
PC time dependent on the event source time zone.
The Universal Time icon displays the data and time based on UT time.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 182
Alarm Viewer
The Filter icon displays three tabs that allow filter criteria to be specified:
Highlight – select the highlight colour for the filter (only displayed if specifying
a filter). Each filter can be allocated a colour to use in the Event Log Viewer to
highlight events, see the Highlighting Events section.
Category – select the required categories.
Identity - select a category. If the selected category is not ‘Any’, the filter
criteria can be specified by data entry or from a drop down list (select the
icon) or (for keyholders) the Advanced Keyholder Search window
(select the icon), see the Specifying a Keyholder as an Operator
section. This tab also allows and or or operators to be selected.
Time – select a date and time range for the filter criteria and a CCTV only
checkbox to display only events related to alarms points linked to a CCTV
video source..
Three buttons are also displayed:
Clear – clears filter criteria that has been applied (if this button is not greyed
out, some events are being filtered out).
Apply – applies the specified filter criteria.
Cancel – cancels filter criteria that has not been applied.
The Report icon displays the Event Log report that provides print facilities.
The Dock/Undock icon docks or undocks the event log (see Tear Off Controls).
8.5.4 Alarm History Toolbar
The alarm history has the following toolbar:
The Resume updates icon cause the event list to resume displaying events.
The Pause updates icon causes the event list to stop showing new events.
The Controller Time icon displays the data and time based on either controller or PC
time dependent on the event source time zone.
The Universal Time icon displays the data and time based on UT time.

8.5.5 CCTV Region Toolbar
The CCTV region has the following toolbar:
Expand
selected
feed
Show all
feeds
Select
feed
Save feed
snapshot
Click here for more information.
Shows all enabled video sources.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 183
Alarm Viewer
A drop down menu containing a list of all enabled video sources. Selecting a video
source from this list will cause it to be selected (outlined in a red rectangle) in the CCTV
board.
Saves a still image from the selected video source. The image is saved to the My
Pictures folder with an automatically generated name, consisting of the camera name,
the date and time the still image was saved.
Displays a drop down menu containing a list of presets associated with the selected
Presets list video source. Selecting a preset will cause the video source to behave according to the
conditions of the preset.
Zoom
Pan left
Tilt up
Tilt down
Pan right
Displays a drop down menu contain zoom options. The available options are:
Zoom In - sets the selected video source to zoom in by a large amount.
Nudge In - sets the selected video source to zoom in by a small amount.
Nudge Out - sets the selected video source to zoom out by a small amount.
Zoom Out - sets the selected video source to zoom out by a large amount.
Zooming can also be controlled using the mouse and keyboard.
Click here for more information.
8.6 Alarm/Event Region
8.6.1 Active Alarms
This board is used to:
1. Display alarm information, and
2. Manage alarms when they occur.
When the Active Alarms Board is selected the Active Alarms Toolbar is displayed.
8.6.1.1 Alarm Information
The Active Alarms tab displays the following types of alarms:
1. Current - this is an alarm that is currently active but has not been restored or
acknowledged.
2. Restored - alarms that have had the condition that cause them cleared, for example,
a door left open has been closed, but has not been acknowledged.
3. Acknowledged - alarms that have not been restored, but have been acknowledged.
Active Alarm List Headings
Active alarms are displayed in a list with the following headings:
1. Time - the date and time the alarm occurred at.
2. Priority - the priority of the alarm. This is a value between 1 and 99, and it is set in the

Alarm Management tab of the selected Area's property page in the Administration
Software.
3. Source - the source of the alarm, e.g. a door or input.
4. Alarm - the type of alarm.
5. Status - the status of the current alarm.
Adding and Removing Headings
The Active Alarms headings can be turned off and on by right clicking the headings and
checking/unchecking the items as required.
8.6.1.2 Viewing Associated Active Alarm Information
To view associated alarm information, double click the active alarm point:
1. The selected Alarm Board / Areas tab will highlight all of items associated with the
selected active alarm.
2. The Map Region (if displayed) will zoom to, and highlight the selected alarm point that
is causing the active alarm.
3. If the CCTV Region is present, and one or more CCTV feeds exist, with presets
associating them with the active alarm, those feeds will be displayed.
8.6.2 Managing Alarms
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 184
Alarm Viewer
Alarms are managed using the commands available in the Active Alarms tab. Commands can
be issued to alarms in three different ways:
1. The Active Alarms toolbar, or
2. The Active Alarms menu, or
3. by context menu.
Toolbar
The Active Alarms Toolbar is displayed when the Active Alarms tab is clicked. It is displayed
above the icon list.
Active Alarms Menu
The Active Alarms Menu is displayed in the Alarm Viewer menu list in when the Active Alarms
tab is selected. This menu contains a command that the toolbar doesn't possess: Show Details
of selected alarm.
Context Menu
The Context Menu is displayed by right clicking on one or more alarms. This menu contains a
command that the toolbar doesn't possess: Show Details of selected alarm.
8.6.3 Acknowledge Commands
8.6.3.1 Acknowledge
The acknowledge command is used by an Alarm Viewer Operator to record information about
an alarm or alarms that are displayed in the Active Alarms.
To acknowledge an Alarm an Alarm Viewer Operator has to:
1. Select a predefined response from the response menu, or
2. enter a comment into the comment box, or
3. both of the above.
Response Menu
One of the responses in this menu must be selected when acknowledging an alarm. A response
is a pre-defined phrase that has some relation to the alarm being acknowledged, for example,
"false alarm", or "door forced".

Predefined comments are entered in the Alarm Responses of the Organisation Options
window (Tools > Options of the Administration Software).
Comment Box
Additional information about the alarm of alarms being acknowledged in this box by the
operator.
8.6.3.2 Acknowledge All
This command will record the same response and / or comment for all occurring alarms.
The Acknowledge All command is launched from:
1. The File Menu, and
2. The Alarm Viewer Toolbar.
8.6.3.3 Acknowledge Selected Command
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 185
Alarm Viewer
This command will record a response and / or comment for the alarm or alarms selected in the
Active Alarms tab.
The acknowledge selected command is launched from the following locations:
1. The Active Alarms Toolbar, and
2. The Active Alarms Context Menu.
8.6.4 Silence Commands
Silence
The Silence command this silences the PC sound, it has no affect on the alarms. It is available
from 2 different locations:
1. File Menu
2. Alarm Viewer Toolbar.
8.6.4.1 Silence All
The Silence All command silences the PC sounder and deactivates all of the area sounders
associated with the areas in alarm. It is available from 2 different locations:
1. File Menu
2. Alarm Viewer Toolbar.
8.6.5 Event Log Viewer
This tab displays an Event Log - the information displayed here is identical to the
Administration Software's event log except that different filters can be set.
When the Event Log Viewer tab is selected, the Event Log Viewer Toolbar is displayed.
8.6.5.1 Event Information List
All events are displayed in a list view, that, by default, contains the following headings:
1. Date and Time - the date and time the event occurred.
2. Category - the category of the event.
3. Originator - the name of the keyholder that caused the event or the type of event from
an hardware item.
4. Source - the name of the operator or hardware item that is affected by the event.
5. Description - a description of the event.
Editing Headings
Event Log list headings can be turned off and on by right clicking on the headings and
checking/unchecking the items as required.

8.6.5.2 Viewing Additional Active Alarm Information
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 186
Alarm Viewer
Alarm Area / Alarm Input Information
Double clicking an entry in the Event Log Viewer will cause the tab selected in the Alarm /
Areas board to highlight items associated with it.
Map Location
If a map is present, double clicking an entry in the Event Log Viewer will highlight its location on
the Map Region.
Detailed Information
Right click an event item to view additional information about it.
8.6.6 Alarm History
This tab displays a list of recent alarm events that have occurred within the selected time
range. This time range is specified in the dialogue box Number of hours to show in the
bottom right hand corner of this tab, and is limited to a maximum range of 24 hours. To view
alarm information older than this use the Alarm History report, located in the Administration
Software's report tab.
When the Alarm History is selected the Alarm History Toolbar is displayed.
8.6.6.1 Alarm History Column Headings
The following information is displayed:
1. Date and Time - the date and time at which the alarm was acknowledged.
2. Originator - the type of alarm from a hardware item.
3. Alarm Point - the name of the Alarm Point that triggered the alarm.
4. Description - this field contains the comments entered when an alarm is acknowledged
or a description of the alarm if it hasn't been acknowledged.
Adding and Removing Headings
Alarm History headings can be turned off and on by right clicking on the headings and
checking/unchecking the items as required.
8.6.6.2 Viewing Additional Active Alarm Information
Alarm Area / Alarm Input Information
Double clicking an entry in the Event Log Viewer will cause the tab selected in the Alarm /
Areas board to highlight items associated with it.
Map Location
If a map is present, double clicking an entry in the Event Log Viewer will highlight its location on
the Map Region.
Detailed Information
Right click an event item to view additional information about it.

8.7 Areas Region
8.7.1 Areas Board
This board is used to:
1. Issue commands to areas - click here for more information.
2. Display area status - the appearance of an icon indicates the area's current state.
Click here for more information.
3. Viewing additional information - see below.
When the Areas tab is selected the Areas Toolbar is displayed, see the Issuing Commands
to Areas section.
Area Board Menu
When the Alarm Board is selected the menu area will display a menu called Areas. Click here
to view its commands.
Area Board Icons
This icon is the default Administration Software icon for Alarm Areas. The
appearance of this icon changes to indicate its current state - click here for more
information.
8.7.1.1 Viewing Associated Alarm Area Information
To view associated alarm area information, double click the required area:
1. The selected Alarm / Event Information tab will highlight all of the events associated
with the selected area.
2. The Map Region (if displayed) will zoom to, and highlight the selected area.
3. If the CCTV Region is present, and one or more CCTV feeds exist, with presets
associating them with the selected area, those feeds will be displayed.
8.7.1.2 Viewing Additional Alarm Area Information
Holding the mouse pointer over an Alarm Area will display a yellow tool tip box which
contains:
1. Area Name
Status - a description of the Alarm Points which that Alarm Area possess.
8.7.2 Issuing Commands to Areas
Areas that are selected in the Areas Board can have commands issued to them in three
different ways:
1. By the Alarm Board toolbar, or
2. by the Areas menu, or
3. by context menu.
8.7.2.1 Toolbar
The Alarm Area toolbar is displayed when the Areas tab is clicked. It is displayed above the
icon list.
8.7.2.2 Areas Menu
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 187
Alarm Viewer
The Areas Menu is displayed in the Alarm Viewer menu list in the top left side of the application.
8.7.2.3 Context Menu
The context menu is displayed by right clicking on an area.

8.7.2.4 Areas Commands
The commands that can be issued to areas from any of the methods listed above are:
Arm
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 188
Alarm Viewer
Selecting this command will display the Arm Areas window. This window contains a list of all
alarm areas, with the areas selected on the alarm board
The areas that where selected when this command was performed will be selected in the list of
alarm areas that the window contains.
Arming an area will cause all of the doors associated with that area to become bolted or locked.
This will prevent keyholders without a disarm privilege access to that area.
Also, arming an area may be a pre-requisite for it reporting one or more alarms. When areas
are configured in the Administration Software the events that can cause it to go into alarm can
be set to always cause an alarm (i.e. regardless of whether it is armed or disarmed) or Only
When Armed (i.e. the area must be armed for that event to cause an alarm).
An Alarm Area can be armed:
• Immediately, or
• By the specified delay in minutes and seconds.
For example: An parent area contains several children - arming the parent will cause its
children to become armed as well.
Disarm
This action is only enabled if an armed area is selected.
Disarming an area will cause all of the doors associated with it to become unbolted or unlocked,
allowing keyholders with appropriate privilege access to it.
Silence
Click here for more information.
Omit
Omitting an area will prevent it from being armed when its parent area is armed. An omit can
be either permanent or for the next arm only - this choice is given in the Omit Alarm Points
from Arm window that is displayed when this option is selected.
For example: An parent area contains several children and one of the children requires
maintenance work - if that child is omitted it will not become armed if its parent is armed, but all
other children will be armed.
Reinstate
This option will cause any area that has been omitted to become active again.
For example: an omitted child area that has been reinstated will become armed when its
parent is armed.
Reset
This option will cause an area's Alarm Sensor Resets to reset any of it inputs that are in alarm.
to a reset state.
Views
This option toggles Alarm Point icon size between large and small.

8.8 Alarm Board Region
8.8.1 Alarm Board
This board is used to
1. Issue commands to alarm inputs- click here for more information.
2. Display area status - the appearance of an icon indicates the area's current state.
Click here for more information.
3. Viewing additional information - see below.
When the Alarm Board tab is selected the Alarm Board Toolbar is displayed, see the Issuing
Commands to Alarm Points section.
8.8.1.1 Alarm Viewer Icons
The different types of icons displayed on the Alarm Viewer are listed below, and their
appearance will change to indicate their state.
500 servers
500 series controllers
Doors
24-hour alarm inputs
Controlled alarm inputs
Information only inputs (only appears in Map Region)
Outputs (only appears in Map Region)
Click here for more information.
8.8.1.2 Alarm Area / Alarm Point Icon States
The table below shows the different states of alarm areas and alarm points.
Disarmed
Armed
Partially Armed
In Alarm
Area
(Default
icon)
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 189
Server Controller Door 24-Hour
Alarm
Alarm Viewer
Controlled
Alarm
input

Acknowledged
Restored
Omitted Once
Omitted
Permanently
Acknowledged
and Silenced
In Alarm and
Silenced
Restored and
Silenced
Two additional icons, the 24-hour information and output icons only appear in the
map region of the Alarm Viewer.
The output icon changes depending on its state: indicates output is on.
indicates output is off.
Acknowledged
This state occurs when an alarm or alarms have been acknowledged.
Silenced
This state occurs when the Silence All command is executed.
An area can be silenced in any three of its alarm states: Acknowledged, In Alarm and
Restored.
Restored
This state occurs when the cause of an alarm is removed (i.e. a forced door has been closed)
but the alarm hasn't been acknowledged.
Omitted
This state occurs when one or more Alarm Point or Alarm Input have been omitted.
Partially Armed
This state occurs when an Alarm Area is armed, and one or more of the constituents (Alarm
Points or Alarm Areas) have been omitted.
8.8.1.3 Viewing Additional Alarm Point Information
Holding the mouse pointer over an Alarm Point will display a yellow tool tip box which
contains:
1. Name - the name of the Alarm Point.
2. Type - the type of Alarm Point.
3. Area - the name of the Alarm Area the Alarm Point is associated with.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 190
Alarm Viewer

4. Mode - the mode assigned to the Alarm Point in its configuration page in the
Administration Software.
5. Status - the status of the Alarm Point.
8.8.2 Issuing Commands to Alarm Points
There are two types of commands that can be issued to alarm points:
1. General commands - these are commands that can be issued to all types of alarm
points (doors, controllers and inputs).
2. Door only commands - commands that can only be issued to doors.
8.8.2.1 General commands
Any selected alarm point(s) can have general commands issued in three different ways:
1. By the Alarm Board toolbar, or
2. by the Alarm Board menu, or
3. by context menu.
8.8.2.2 Door only commands
Door only commands can be issued to the selected doors in two different ways:
1. by the Alarm Board menu, or
2. by context menu.
8.8.2.3 Toolbar
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 191
Alarm Viewer
The Alarm Board toolbar is displayed when the Alarm Board tab is clicked. It is displayed above
the icon list.
8.8.2.4 Alarm Board Menu
The Alarm Board menu is displayed in the Alarm Viewer menu list in the top left side of the
application.
8.8.2.5 Context Menu
The Context Menu is displayed by right clicking on an alarm point.
8.8.2.6 Alarm Input Commands
Omit
Omitting an alarm point will prevent it from being armed when its parent area is armed. An omit
can be either permanent or for the next arm only - this choice is given in the Omit Alarm Points
from Arm window that is displayed when this option is selected.
Alarming an area with one or more alarm input omitted will cause it to be partially armed.
Reinstate
This option will cause any alarm point that has been omitted to become active again.
Views
2. This option toggles Alarm Point icon size between large and small

8.9 Map Region
The Map region is only displayed if a map design is present. Map designs are created using the
Administration Software Alarm Map Designer Application.
8.9.1 Multi-Page Maps
If the map has multiple pages, tabs allowing you to select them will be displayed at the top of
the viewer.
8.9.2 Viewing Alarms
When an alarm has occurred, the Alarm Point which has caused it will be zoomed to on the
map.
8.9.3 Viewing the Map
The following commands can performed on the selected map by using the Map Menu or by
right clicking a part of it:
Small Icons / Large Icons - toggles the icon sizes on the map viewer.
Zoom In - enlarges the selected map.
Zoom Out - shrinks the select map.
100% - shows the full map.
Zoom to fit - zooms to the selected item on the map.
8.9.4 Issuing Commands to Areas, Alarm Points and Outputs
The areas, alarm points and outputs assigned to the map can be commanded by right clicking
on one to display its context menu.
An area's context menu contains the same commands as those offered in the Areas Board.
An alarm point's context menu contains the same commands as those offered in the Alarm
Board.
An output’s context menu contains the following commands: Turn output on, Turn output off,
Show details of output, and Small icons.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 192
Alarm Viewer

8.10 CCTV Region
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 193
Alarm Viewer
The CCTV region is displayed if one or more video sources are present. Video sources are
configured using the Administration Software Video Source module.
When the CCTV region is present, a CCTV Menu is displayed in the main menu, a CCTV
Region Toolbar is displayed in the CCTV Region and pictures from the video sources that have
been selected using the Select option on the CCTV Region Toolbar are displayed.
Commands can be issued to video sources by using:
1. CCTV Region Toolbar
2. CCTV Menu,
3. Context Menu – right clicking in this region displays the same options as the CCTV
Menu (except Select).
4. Additional controls shown when video sources are expanded.
8.10.1 Expanding Video Sources
Double clicking or expanding a video source (using the CCTV Menu, Context Menu or
Toolbar command) in the picture area will cause that feed to enlarge to the size of the CCTV
Board.
When a video source is expanded additional features will be made available, provided the
selected video source supports them . The controls available are:
1. PTZ (pan, tilt and zoom)
2. Archiving.
8.10.2 Panning, Tilting and Enlarging
Panning and Tilting
A single click on a PTZ video source will try to move the camera to centre of the clicked point in
the view.
When the mouse button is held down, the cursor turns to a yellow blob and the position of
the mouse now controls the speed of the camera. Return the mouse to the initial position or
release the mouse button to stop. The speed of movement is represented by the mouse cursor
as an arrow.
Zooming
Scrolling the mouse wheel forwards will cause the video source to zoom in and scrolling
backwards will cause it to zoom out.
Enlarging
Toolbar Control
When a video source that supports PTZ is
expanded vertical and horizontal scroll
bars are displayed which are used to pan
and tilt the feed. A slider bar to the right of
the vertical scroll bar is used to control
zooming.
Selecting a PTZ enabled feed will enable the pan, tilt and zoom toolbar buttons, which can
then be used to control that camera.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 194
Alarm Viewer
Keyboard Control
Holding one of the four arrow keys will move the camera in the selected direction. Holding the +
or – key will zoom in or out.
8.10.3 CCTV Archive Tools
This is a feature available to video sources
that support archiving. Double clicking or
expanding a video source in the CCTV
Region will display archiving tools.
Enabling the Archiving Tools
Once selected, this feature is enabled by unchecking the textbox labelled live in the lower right
hand corner of the window.
Event Control
This control represents a section of time with a starting point and an end point. The track bar in
the centre can be used to move rapidly to any point in the selected time interval. The Arrow
button on the left will rewind playback to the start point of the selected time interval. The right
arrow will move to the end. Normal playback will pause on reaching the end of the selected
interval.
At any time, the Cut buttons on the left or right can be used to set the start or end point of the
selected interval to the current playback time shown in the tape counter. If you want to select a
larger time interval, you can go to the end of the interval and press play to continue playback
past the end. You can also adjust the current position using the Tape Counter to play back
video from outside the selected time interval. Use the Cut buttons as before to set the start or
end point to the current time shown in the tape counter.
When you select an event or an alarm the event control is set to give playback from 5 seconds
before the event to 15 seconds after.
To change the time period of the intervals, move to the desired event (using the date stamp or
play speed control) and click the required set interval button ( ).
Tape Counter
This control shows the date and time of the recording currently being shown. When viewing
recordings You can also set the values in this control to move to any position in the recorded
video.
Play Speed
This shows the playback speed selected for viewing recordings. Speed 0 is paused, speed 1 is
normal real time playback. Larger values are fast forward. Negative values are reverse. Play
speed can be adjusted by entering a number, clicking on the buttons, or sliding the track bar.
Pressing fast forward or rewind again will increase the speed.

8.11 If an Alarm Occurs
8.11.1 When an alarm occurs....
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 195
Alarm Viewer
When an alarm occurs the Alarm Viewer will perform the following actions:
1. An entry will appear in the Active Alarms tab, displaying information about the alarm
2. The appearance of the Alarm Input and Alarm Area will change to indicate an alarm is
occurring.
3. If an alarm sound has been defined, it will alarm will sound on your PC. The alarm
sound is defined in the Alarms Response option of the Organisation Options window
(Tools > Options in the Administration Software).
8.11.2 What to do if an alarm occurs....
An Operator has the following options:
1. Silence all alarms - turn off the Administration Software alarm sound and stop any
alarm sounders.
2. View Alarm Point information - to view more information about the Alarm Point
generating the alarm, select in the Active Alarms List and use the show details
command.
3. View Alarm Map information (this assumes that an alarm map has been created)
a. Double clicking an entry in the Active Alarms list will cause the Alarm Map
display and highlight the item that is generating the alarm.
b. Double clicking the Alarm Area that is currently in alarm will cause it to be
zoomed to on the Alarm Map.
4. Acknowledge alarms - alarms can be acknowledged in two ways:
a. All at once - If many alarms have occurred they can be acknowledged with one
comment using the Acknowledge All command.
b. Individually - individual comments can be recorded for the alarm selected in the
Active Alarms List by using the Acknowledge command.
5. Restore an alarm - to restore an alarm, its cause must be removed, for example, a
door left open has been closed.
8.11.3 How to stop (clear) an alarm
An alarm is stopped (cleared) when it has been restored and acknowledged.
1. Restored is when the cause of the alarm has been removed, for example, a door left
open has been closed.
2. Acknowledged is when the operator has noticed the alarm and acknowledged it via
the menus, toolbar or context menu.
8.11.4 What to do after an alarm...
Reset alarm
The Reset Alarm command needs to be carried out on any Alarm Areas that have associated
Alarm Points with the Requires Reset option checked.

9. Event Facilities
9.1 Event Log
Note
If simple alarm monitoring is being used (i.e. alarm management not licensed), see
Alarm Events section
To display the event log:
• Select Tools > View Event Log (via the
Menus) or Tools > Event Log (via the
Explorer Bar) and the event log is
displayed.
The event log can be moved about the
screen by dragging and dropping the tab
(see Tear Off Controls).
The following information can be displayed selected by right click on column heading:
Vid An icon is displayed if the event has an associated video clip.
Controller Time / The date and time the event occurred based on the controller time or on
Universal Time the UT time depending on the icon selected on the toolbar.
Category The category of the event (i.e. alarm, system, authorised, denied comms,
audit, or restored).
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 196
Event Facilities
Originator The name of the keyholder that caused the event or the type of event from
an hardware item.
Source The name of the operator or hardware item that is affected by the event.
Description A description of the event.
Organisation The organisational unit where the event occurred.
The event log has the following toolbar:
The Play icon refreshes the event log automatically when a new event occurs.
The Pause icon prevents the event log being updated when a new event occurs.
The Controller Time icon displays the data and time based on either controller or
PC time dependent on the event source time zone.
The Universal Time icon displays the data and time based on UT time.
The Filter icon displays three tabs that allow filter criteria to be specified:
Highlight – select the highlight colour for the filter (only displayed if specifying
a filter). Each filter can be allocated a colour to use in the Event Log to
highlight events, see the Highlighting Events section.
Category – select the required categories.
Identity - select a category. If the selected category is not ‘Any’, the filter
criteria can be specified by data entry or from a drop down list (select the
icon) or (for keyholders) the Advanced Keyholder Search window

(select the icon), see the Specifying a Keyholder as an Operator
section. This tab also allows and or or operators to be selected.
Time – select a date and time range for the filter criteria and a CCTV only
checkbox to display only events related to alarms points linked to a CCTV
video source.
Three buttons are also displayed:
Clear – clears filter criteria that has been applied (if this button is not greyed
out, some events are being filtered out).
Apply – applies the specified filter criteria.
Cancel – cancels filter criteria that has not been applied.
The Show as a Report icon displays the Event Log report that provides print
facilities.
The Refresh icon updates the event log.
The Dock/Undock icon docks or undocks the event log (see Tear Off Controls).
To select which columns to display:
1. Right click on the column heading.
2. Select which columns to display from the drop-down menu.
To display information on items associated with the event:
• Right click on the event and select Show Details for item or Navigate to item from the
drop-down menu.
To display information on an audit event:
• Right click on the event and select Show Audit Details from the drop-down menu.
To create a keyholder when an unknown keyholder event occurs:
1. Right click on the event and select the Copy keycode option.
2. Select the Keyholder module and New button.
3. Select the Keyholder Keys tab and Add New Key button.
4. Right click on the Key Code field, select the Paste option and the copied key code is
entered in to the field.
5. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information for the new keyholder.
6. Select the Add button.
To forgive an anti-passback violation by a keyholder:
• Right click on the event and select the Anti-Passback Forgive option.
To close the event log:
• Select on the tab.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 197
Event Facilities

9.1.1.1 Highlighting Events
To allocate a colour to an events filter:
1. Display the Event Log.
2. If the Filter bar is not already
displayed, select the Filter
icon.
3. Select a filter or the Add button.
4. Enter the filter name and (if
required) a description.
5. Select the Colour button and
select a colour for the event
filter (e.g. red for alarms).
6. Specify a filter by selecting the
appropriate tab(s) and
specifying the filter criteria (e.g.
select the Category tab and
deselect all event types except
the Alarms checkbox).
7. Select Apply to display the
results.
To move an entry in the list:
1. Select the event filter.
2. Select the up or down button
next to the Colour button.
Note
The position in the list
determines the colour used if
an event satisfies more than
one search criteria.
To delete an entry from the list:
1. Select the event filter.
2. Select the Delete button.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 198
In this example alarms are shown in red and denied
access events in yellow.
Event Facilities

To save a set of event filters:
1. Select Rules.
2. Enter the file name and (if
required) a description.
3. Select the Save button.
To load a set of event filters:
1. Select Rules.
2. Select the Load button.
To specify the main filter:
1. Select Filter.
2. Specify a filter by selecting the
appropriate tab(s) and
specifying the filter criteria.
3. Select the Apply button.
Note
The main filter may filter out
highlighted events.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 199
Event Facilities

9.2 Alarm Events and System Alarms
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 200
Event Facilities
If simple alarm monitoring is being used (i.e. alarm management is not licensed or selected
alarms are not assigned to an area) the events to be classed as alarms can be specified by
customisation and be monitored by the System Alarms window.
The window is displayed if alarm events or system alarms are detected at login and when a new
alarm is generated.
The window can also be displayed by selecting Tools > System Alarms (see Menus section).
To acknowledge the alarm(s), select the Clear
All button.
To update the alarm list, select the Refresh
list.
To prevent the window being displayed other
than at login, select the Do not pop up this
dialog again (until next login) checkbox.
To close the window, select the Close
window.

9.3 Alarm Alerts
If Alarm Alert popups are enabled, any alarms will be displayed in the bottom right corner of
the screen even when administration software is not running.
To enable Alarm Alert popups:
• Select File > Activate Alarm Alerts (see
the Menus section).
Changes will not take effect until Windows is
logged off and on again.
An Alarm Alerts icon will appear in the
Windows taskbar. The icon's appearance
depends on the area/alarm state:
Disarmed Area
Armed Area
Partially Armed Area
To close the popup:
• Select the icon.
To perform Alarm Alert tasks:
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 201
In Alarm
Acknowledged Alarm
Restored Alarm
Server Connection Lost
• Right click the Alarm Alert icon and the following options are available:
Show User Interface - displays the Logon window.
Run Alarm Viewer - displays the Logon window.
Option - the following options are available:
Popups for access events - enables/disables No popup for access events,
Popup access denied only, or Popup any access events.
Popups for alarm events - enables/disables All alarms in one popup, One
popup per alarm area, or Popup for each alarm point.
Activate Alarm Alerts - deselection disables the Alarm Alert popups.
Exit - Exits the administration software and disables Alarm Alert popups.
To disable Alarm Alert popups:
• Select File > Activate Alarm Alerts (see the Menus section).
or
• Right click on the Alarm Alerts icon and deselect the Activate Alarms Alerts option.
Changes will not take effect until Windows is logged off and on again.
Event Facilities

9.4 Event Archive
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 202
Event Facilities
Archiving can be performed manually or automatically.
Notes
1. Archiving is specified using the Customisation facilities and the name of the files
created are Edate.CSV. All archive files are in CSV (Comma-Separated Value) text file
format.
2. Only one archive can be performed each day and archives can only be performed if the
minimum number of events to archive are available.
3. Automatic archiving is not possible until at least Archive events older than (e.g. 7)
days of events are available (see the Event Archiving section).
4. Automatic archives are then performed at 18:00 only if the minimum number of events
to archive are available and a manual archive has not been performed that day.
When the event log is 80% full, an Event log
archive due window is displayed.
To manually archive the event log:
1. Select the Yes button on the Event log
archive due window or Tools > Event
Archiving (either via the Menus or
Explorer Bar) and the Event Archiving
window is displayed.
2. Enter the Archive Destination (i.e. the
location of the archive file that will be
created) or use the browse facility.
3. Select the From oldest event up to and
including events on this day radio
button and specify a date.
or
Select the Percentage of events to
archive radio button and specify the
percentage.
4. Select the Start button.
To view the event archive history:
• Select the Archive History tab.
The following is then displayed for each archived file:
Archive Date The date the archive was made.
Filename The file name of archived data.
Earliest Event The time and date of the earliest event in the archive file.
Latest Event The time and date of the latest event in the archive file.

Discarded An indication as to whether events have been discarded instead of
archived.
Reloaded An indication as to whether archived events have been restored.
Location The physical location of the archive media.
Comment The comment entered by the operator when events were archived.
To edit the comment:
1. Select the Edit button and the Archive
File Status window is displayed.
2. The archive file is marked as Present by
default but can be marked as Lost if it has
been lost or deleted.
3. The comment can be created or edited.
4. Select the OK button.
To display the event statistics:
• Select the Event Statistics tab.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 203
Event Facilities
The following is then displayed:
Event Total/Max: Then number of events not archived and the number of events
required before archive will occur.
Earliest event timestamp The earliest event not archived.
Latest event timestamp The latest event not archived.
Total days of events The number of days not archived.
Total events for archive The number of events that will be archived if a manual or
automatic archive is performed. If Automatic is 0, the
minimum number of events for an automatic archive are not
available and an automatic archive will not be performed if this
condition exists at 18:00.
Percentage of events The percentage of events that can be archived if a manual or
archivable
automatic archive is performed.

9.5 Event Archive Restore
To restore an archived event file:
1. The event report is used to restore
archived events. When the events report
is selected, a range of dates are specified
and if these dates require an archived
event file, the Event Archive Restoral
window is displayed.
2. Select which files to restore and the file
path of their location.
3. Select the Continue button and the files
will be restored.
4. If a file is not found, an error message is
displayed which then redisplays the Event
Archive Restoral window. The missing
file can be removed from the list and the
Continue button used to restore the other
files.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 204
Event Facilities

9.6 Event to Action
9.6.1 Introduction
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 205
Event Facilities
The Event to Action facility enables system actions to be activated based on an event occurring
within the system. Each set of actions for a specified event is called and each scenario can
specify one or more actions linked to a specific event.
To specify a scenario, click here.
To add each event and its associated action in the scenario, click here.
To configure muster and evacuation, click here.
Note
The Event to Action facility for 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers is implemented
via the Output Activation tab of the Controller Outputs page.
9.6.2 Event to Action Details
To specify a scenario:
1. Select Event to Action Configuration in
the Shortcut tab or Tools menu and the
Event to Action Configuration window is
displayed.
2. If necessary, select the organisational
unit.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
4. Select the New button.
The following can then be specified:
Name The name of the scenario (specified by data entry).
Description A description of the scenario (specified by data entry).
Time Profile
The time profile during which the scenario is active (selected from a dropdown
list).
• Select the Add button and it changes to Update.
Now add the event and associated actions.
9.6.3 Event to Action Configuration
To specify the event and add its associated actions in the scenario:
1. Specify the scenario as described in the
Event to Action Details section.
2. Select the Configuration tab.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 206
Event Facilities
The following can then be specified:
Type The type of item that may generate the event (selected from a drop-down list).
Name
The name of the item that may generate the event (selected from a dropdown
list).
When Condition
To add an event:
The event that will trigger the action (selected from a drop-down list).
• Select the Add button.
The following can then be specified:
Perform The action to take if the event occurs (selected from a drop-down list).
The output to turn on or off if the event occurs (selected from a drop-down
Target
list). Not used if the action is to send an e-mail.
The recipient and subject of the e-mail (specified by selecting the field, then
Action Settings
, and the Configure Send Email window is displayed. Not used if the
action is to turn an output on or off.
To delete an event:
1. Select the event.
2. Select the Delete button.
To test an event:
1. Select the event.
2. Select the Test button.
To confirm any changes to the scenario:
• Select Add/Update button.
To cancel any changes to the scenario:
• Select Cancel button.
To delete a scenario:
1. Select the scenario.
2. Select the Delete button.
If licensed for remote event-to-action, inputs on one 500 can be selected to trigger
actions on a different 500. These remote actions are intentionally distinguished from
normal (local) actions because they require the PC to be switched on, require the target
500 as well as the source 500 to be working, and they take longer to activate because
the events have to get back to the event manager before any action can be taken.
Because of this, remote actions have a 5-minute timeout: if the initiating event does not
reach the event manager within 5 minutes, the event manager does not perform the
action. Instead it sends a message to the log. The 5-minute timeout could be reached
after a communications failure and recovery or a huge amounts of events are being
handled.

9.6.4 Configure Send Email
To configure an email that is sent if a specified event occurs:
• Display the Configure Send Email window
as described in the Event to Action
Configuration section.
The following can then be specified:
The name of the keyholder to whom the email is to be sent (selected
Keyholder from a drop-down list). The keyholder must have an email address
specified.
Subject The subject of the email (specified by data entry).
Send cause of
action
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 207
An indication that the cause of the action should be included in the email
(specified by check box).
Message The message to be included in the email (specified by data entry).
To confirm any changes:
• Select the OK button.
To cancel any changes:
• Select the Cancel button.
Event Facilities

9.7 Muster and Evacuation
9.7.1 Introduction
The Muster and Evacuation facility works through the Event to Action facility, which enables
system actions to be activated, based on an event occurring within the system. Each set of
actions for a specified event is called a scenario and each scenario can specify one or more
actions linked to a specific event.
To specify a scenario, click here.
To add each event and its associated action in the scenario, Click here.
9.7.2 Specifying the Alarm Point for Muster
In order to configure a muster alarm, several conditions must be fulfilled.
1. The digital input must be an alarm point.
Select the Navigator tab followed by the Door option. Select the door to which the Muster
event is to be connected. Select the Access tab. The appropriate SIG frame will show the
Reader selected in the Muster Configuration process and the name of the Muster event.
Once a Muster has been configured the SIG details are not editable within this screen.
2. Ensure that the Input Mode is a 24-Hour Alarm.
Select the Navigator tab followed by the Hardware option. Select the controller through which
the Muster event is configured. Select the reader through which the Muster event is to be
configured. Select the Inputs tab. Select the relay through which the Muster event is to be
configured. Select the Input Configuration tab.
This must be completed before the Muster configuration can be created, otherwise the muster
configuration will fail and an error message will appear.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 208
Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 209
Event Facilities
3. Ensure that the alarm is assigned to an area.
Select the Navigator tab followed by the Hardware option. In the tree list view of the
Connected Controllers a list of the Muster controllers is displayed along with the associated
doors.
Select a Muster Controller to display it’s properties. The properties frame displays tabs for
Controller Details, Doors, Inputs, Outputs and Alarm Management. Within the Inputs tab
are the Input Configuration and Alarm Properties tabs. Select the Alarm Properties tab and
the Alarm Area box in order to assign the alarm to an area for display with the Alarm Viewer.
If the area is disassociated from the alarm an error message will appear.

9.7.3 Muster Details
To specify a scenario:
1. Select Event to Action Configuration in
the Shortcut tab or Tools menu and the
Event to Action Configuration window is
displayed.
2. If necessary, select the organisational
unit.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
4. Select the New button.
The following can then be specified within the Details tab:
Name The name of the scenario (specified by data entry).
Description A description of the scenario (specified by data entry).
The time profile during which the scenario is active (selected from a drop-
Time Profile
down list).
Select the Add button and it changes to Update.
Now add the event and associated actions.
9.7.4 Event to Action - 1
The following can be specified within the Event to Action Configuration tab:
The source of the input signal (specified by drop-down menu list)
Type
must be a Controller Input.
Name The name of the signal provider (specified by drop-down menu)
When condition
Select Add and a new
entry will be created with
Perform, Target and
Action settings fields.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 210
A description of times in which the scenario is active (selected from
a drop-down list) e.g. when Input normal, Input tamper cleared etc.
Perform You should select Muster for this option.
Target Not applicable for Muster configuration.
Action Settings This box remains empty, except for an expand button. Select
this button to display the Muster Configuration window.
Event Facilities

9.7.5 Muster Configuration
Once the expand button inside the Action Settings box has been selected, a new Muster
Configuration window will open and the following options will be available:
General, Server Printers, Readers.
General Muster Name
Server
Printers
Alarm reset requires
acknowledgement
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 211
A Muster name must be added.
The OK button will remain grey until a name
has been entered.
All alarms must be assigned to an area.
If checked, the muster will not stop until the
alarm generated by the muster start has
been acknowledged and cleared.
If not checked, then once the digital input
(24 hour alarm point which triggered the
event to action) has returned to its normal
state, the muster will stop.
Event Facilities
Select and Add the Printer to be used for generating the Muster report. This can be
any printer configured on the PC on which the PAC SecureNet server is installed.
After the Printer has been selected further options become available within the General tab.
General Report Printing Setup Repeat
Delay
Select the time, in minutes, to specify the
report printing frequency.

Readers
Repeat
Count
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 212
Select the number of times the Muster
report is required to be printed.
Select the one, or more, Reader(s) to be used for Mustering. The list of available
readers will be displayed for selection.
Note:
Any readers selected for mustering will not be available for normal access use.
Event Facilities
Once the Muster configuration has been completed, select OK to accept the changes or select
Cancel at any time to abandon the changes made.
Only one Muster Configuration is available per Organisational Unit.
If an attempt is made to add a second Muster Configuration then an error window will appear
stating “License exceeded. You are only licensed for 1 Muster record(s).”
Select OK to acknowledge and close this window.

9.7.6 Event to Action Configuration - 2
The name of the Muster Configuration created will now appear in the Action Settings tab of the
Event to Action window.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 213
Event Facilities
• Select the Add button to add more actions to perform or Delete to remove the action. Test
is not available when configuring a Muster.
To add a scenario:
1. Select the scenario.
2. Select the Add button.
To delete an event:
1. Select the event.
2. Select the Delete button.
To confirm any changes to the scenario:
• Select Add/Update button.
To cancel any changes to the scenario:
• Select Cancel button.
To delete a scenario:
• Select Delete button.
Select OK to close the Event to Action Configuration window.
9.7.7 Muster Operation
After a Muster alarm is raised:
• Muster mode is entered – the event log shows an alarm raised.
• Alarm viewer maximises to show the area where the alarm has been raised.
• The Muster report window opens.
• The Initial Muster report optionally prints.
• The Muster report on screen refreshes each time a token is presented to any reader and/or
every minute if no token is presented.
• Muster mode remains active until the associated activating alarm is cleared, i.e. the alarm is
acknowledged and the alarm state is returned to normal.

Note:
• The Alarm viewer will only display if it is already running or if the option to automatically
open in the event of an alarm being raised has been selected in the currently logged on
operator’s options.
• The Muster report window will only open if the Alarm viewer opens.
• If the Alarm viewer is closed then the Muster report window is also closed.
• If the Muster report window is closed it can be re-opened from within the Alarm viewer,
View > Muster Report.
Each time a token is presented to a Muster reader, the Event log will show two events
• A Token has been presented to the Muster reader
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 214
Event Facilities
• The Keyholder has been mustered i.e. the keyholder’s name now appears on the Muster
report and triggers the Muster screen and report to refresh.
If a token is used within the alarm area whilst the area is in muster mode then the report screen
will refresh showing the last known location of all keyholders (tokens) still in the building.
If a token is used within the area whilst no muster alarm is in process then the report screen will
refresh showing the last known location of all keyholders.

10. Other Facilities
10.1 Modems
To configure a modem:
1. Select the Hardware in the Explorer bar.
2. Select the channel the modem is
connected to.
3. Select Hardware > Modems (via the
Menus) or the icon (in the toolbar)
and the Modems windows is displayed.
4. Select a modem from the list of available
modems
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 215
Other Facilities
The following can then be specified:
Use this modem The modem is enabled for use (specified by check box).
Name The name of the modem (specified by data entry).
Dialback number The telephone number for dialback to the PC (specified by data entry
and enabled by check box).
Current Number The current telephone number of the modem (automatically
entered).
To dialup/hangup a modem:
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.
2. Select the dialup channel, select Hardware
> Dial Up, Show Call Progress or Hang
Up (via the Menus) and the Dialup
Connection window is displayed.
or
Right click on the dialup channel and select
the Dial Now, Show Call Progress or
Hang Up option and the Dialup
Connection window is displayed.
3. Select Dial Now to dialup the modem, or
Hang Up to hang up the connection, or
Close to close the window.
To reset dialup password:
This procedure is required if a Failed authentication for dialup channel message is obtained.
This occurs because a password is used to establish communication between the PC and
controller. If a controller or PC is changed, the password will need to be reset at the controller
and PC.
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.
2. Select the dialup channel, select Hardware
> Reset Password (via the Menus) and
the Reset Password window is displayed.
or
Right click on the dialup channel and select
the Reset Password option and the Reset
Dialup Password window is displayed..
3. Select OK and the Reset Password

window is displayed.
4. Power down the controller.
5. Press the One-Touch button whilst
restoring the power and release button
when the LED flashes at its normal rate.
6. Select OK to close the window.
10.2 Modem Initialization String
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 216
Other Facilities
If additional parameters are required in the modem initialisation string (see the manufacturer's
modem documentation) the additional parameters can be specified before taking the controller
to its remote location and connecting the modem.
The controller should be connected on a direct line and probed. The additional parameters can
then be specified. After specification the controller can be moved to its remote location,
connected to its modem and probed again.
To specify additional parameters for the modem initialization string:
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.
2. Right click on the controller and select Set
Modem Intialization String or select the
controller select Hardware > Set Modem
Intialization String (via the Menus) and
the Modem Intialization String windows
is displayed.
3. Select the Additional Parameters
checkbox and enter any additional
parameters required for the modem.
10.3 Database Backup
To backup the database:
1. Select Tools > Backup Database (either
via the Menus or Explorer Bar) and the
Backup window is displayed.
2. Select a folder using the browse facility
and enter a file name. A default location is
set at installation.
3. If the event log is not to be backed up,
deselect the Backup Events Table check
box.
4. Select the Backup button.
A backup can also be performed using the following command:
“C:\Program Files\ Administration Software\Bin\Bin.NET\PACUI.exe” /BACKUP
Notes
1. Administration Software is the name of the administration software.
2. This command cannot be performed on a client PC.
3. A scheduled Windows Task can be created to provide an automated, regular backup,
click here.

To schedule a regular backup:
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 217
Other Facilities
A Windows Scheduling Task can be created to provide an automated regular backup.
Notes
1. Further information on running Task Scheduler is given in the Windows helpfile.
2. This command can only be used on the server PC
Procedure
1. Select Start > Settings >Control Panel >Scheduler Tasks and the Scheduled Tasks
window is displayed.
2. Select Add Schedule Tasks and the Schedule Task Wizard window is displayed.
3. Select the Next button and use the Browse facility to locate the PACUI.exe file in the
Bin\Bin.Net folder of the administration software installation.
4. Double click on the PACUI.exe file and specify the task name and when the task is to be
performed.
5. Select Next and enter the user name of the computer (in domainname\username format),
enter a password and confirmation.
6. Select Next and select the Open advanced properties for this task when I click Finish
checkbox.
7. Select Finish and add space/BACKUP to the Run command:
“c:\Program Files\Administration Software\Bin\Bin.NET\PACUI.exe” /BACKUP
8. Select OK and backup files will be created as scheduled. The backup file format name is
EKA_yearmonthday_hourminute.ekb (e.g. EKA 20080927_1200.ekb) and will be located in
the default folder.
To restore the backup, see the Restore section.
10.4 Import
To import a database:
1. Select File > Import (via the Menus) and
the File Import window is displayed.
2. Select the type of import file from the list
and use the Browse facility to select the
file to import.
3. Select the Import button.
Note
After an import a database download is required on all channels.

10.5 Upgrade License
The software can be upgraded to an option that provides more facilities (e.g. more keyholders
and doors (see the Specification section).
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 218
Other Facilities
Make a note of the license key. If Administration Software is upgraded and re-installed,
the license key must be re-entered.
To upgrade the software license:
1. Contact your license provider to obtain a
new license key. They will require your
system fingerprint number and your
current license key. These are displayed
on the License Keys window
2. Select Tools > Upgrade License (via the
Menus) and the License Keys window is
displayed.
3. Select the New Licence button and the
new window is displayed.
4. Enter your new license key provided by
license provider.
5. Select the OK button.
To delete a licence key:
1. Select a licence key.
2. Select the Delete button.
To print the software license details:
• Select the Print button.
To close the window:
• Select the Close button.

10.6 Configure Peripherals
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 219
Other Facilities
An administration reader (desktop reader) can be connected to a controller via PC interface kit.
This administration reader can be used to assign keys to keyholders.
The Admin Reader tab configures the COM port that the administration reader is connected.
The Encoder tab specifies additional information required if a MSR206 Magnetic Stripe Card
Writer is being used as an administration reader.
To configure the administration reader:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select Tools > Configure Peripherals
and the Configure Peripherals window is
displayed.
3. .If necessary, select the Admin Reader
tab.
4. Select the channel that has the
administration reader connected.
5. Select the Click to test checkbox, present
a key to the reader, and the key's code
should be displayed.
If the token number does not appear, check:
• The administration kit is connected to the
correct port on the PC.
• The administration kit is powered up.
• The administration kit is correctly wired to
the desktop reader, administration
computer, and controller (if one is
connected via the administration kit).
• If a 1100/2100/2200 master controller has
been configured on the administration kit
channel, the administration kit cannot be
configured if the master controller is not
connected or communicating. If this
occurs, deselect the Online checkbox on
the master controller Details tab.
To specify additional information for a MSR206 Magnetic Stripe Card Writer:
1. Select the Encoder tab.
2. Select the PC communications port that
has the administration reader attached.
Ensure that the encoder is not
connected to a COM port that has been
configured for something else.
3. Select the coercivity (High or Low) .
4. Select the density at which information is
written to the card (range 75 to 210 bits
per inch).
Consult the reader manufacturer's
documentation for correct settings.

To close a window:
• Select the Close button.
To encode a magnetic stripe card:
• Click here.
10.7 Manage Controller Firmware
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 220
Other Facilities
Updated firmware for the 500 series can be added to the Administration Software database and
downloaded to the servers and controllers.
To add the controller firmware:
1. Copy the firmware file to the Firmware
Images folder.
2. Select Tools > Manage Controller
Firmware (via the Menus) and the
Manage Controller Firmware window is
displayed.
3. If servers and controllers have been
specified, select the appropriate tab.
4. If a firmware version has already been
added, it can be deleted by selecting the
Delete button.
5. Select the Add button and the Controller
Firmware Files window is displayed.
6. Navigate to the Firmware Images folder.
7. Select the required firmware file and Open
or double click on the file.
8. The Manage Controller Firmware
window is then updated with the following
information:
Firmware Version The firmware that has been added.
Firmware Type The type of firmware added. Different types may provide different
features.
Min Board Rev The minimum revision number of the printed circuit board required for
a download to the controller.
Max Board Rev The maximum revision number of the printed circuit board required for
a download to the controller.
Support Hardware The type of controllers supported by this firmware.
9. Select the Close button.
To download the added firmware to a server or controller:
Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 221
Other Facilities
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a server or controller in the List
View.
3. .Select the Tasks button and Firmware
download from the drop-down menu or
Hardware > Firmware download (via the
Menus) and the Manage Firmware
window is displayed.
4. If necessary, select the firmware version.
5. Select the Download button.
Repeat for each controller.
To reset the server password:
This procedure is required if an Authorisation failed (password reset may be required) message
is obtained.
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.
2. Select the 500 TCP/IP channel, select
Hardware > Reset Password (via the
Menus) and the Reset Password window
is displayed.
or
Right click on the 500 TCP/IP channel and
select the Reset Password option and the
Reset Dialup Password window is
displayed.
3. Select OK and the Reset Password
window is displayed.
4. Power down the server and press the One-
Touch button for app. 7 seconds while
powering up. The LED goes out when the
password has been reset and then
resumes normal flashing.
5. Select OK to close the window.
10.8 Change Password
To change a password:
1. Select Tools > Change Password (via
the Menus) and the Change Password
window is displayed.
2. Enter the old password.
3. Enter the new password (at least 6
characters) and confirm password.
4. Select OK.

10.9 Search for a Keyholder
When searching for a keyholder, there are three methods.
Key Seek
1. Select the icon, or press F3 or Tools
> Key Seek (via the Menus) and the
Find a Keyholder by Key window is
displayed.
2. Select the type of reader.
3. Present the key to the administration
reader or enter the key number.
4. Select Find. All organisational units are
searched.
Search Bar (only available in Keyholder module)
1. Select the icon, press Ctrl-F or Tools
> Search Bar and the Search bar is
displayed.
2. Enter search criteria (e.g. last name).
3. If searching for a key code, select the Key
Code check box and card format. Then
present the key to the administration
reader or enter the key code.
4. Select the Search button and the
keyholder is displayed in the Keyholder
Property Page. An icon next to the field
indicates that the field is being used in the
search.
5. To search other organisational units,
select the Search Organisations link and
the Advanced Keyholder Search window
is displayed.
Advanced Keyholder Search
1. Press Ctrl-F or select the Search
Organisations link on the Keyholder
modules Search bar and the Advanced
Keyholder Search window is displayed.
2. Enter the organisational unit to search
(select ‘Any’ to search all organisational
units).
3. Enter search criteria (e.g. last name).
4. Select the Search button and the
keyholder is displayed in the Keyholder
Property Page. An icon next to the field
indicates that the field is being used in the
search.
To display the keyholder details:
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 222
Note
The Key Code check box must be
deselected before adding keys.
Other Facilities
• Select the keyholder displayed in the Keyholder module or Advanced Keyholder Search
window.
To perform a new search on the Advanced Keyholder Search window or Search bar:
1. Select the Reset button.

2. Enter new search criteria.
3. Select the Search button.
To close the Advanced Keyholder Search window or Search bar:
• Select the Cancel button.
10.10 Encode Keycode
To encode a magnetic stripe card using a MSR206 Magnetic Stripe Card Writer:
1. Select a keyholder and Keyholders >
Encode Keycode in the menus, or Tasks
> Encode Keycode on the Keyholder
Details tab, or right click on a keyholder
and select Encode Keycode and the
Encode Keycode window is displayed.
2. A list of keycodes available for encoding is
displayed
3. Select a keycode and swipe the card and
the card will be encoded (the encoding
can be cancelled by selecting the Cancel
button).
4. Another keycode can be selected and
card swiped or the window can be closed.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 223
Other Facilities
To print and encode a magnetic stripe card using an Eltron P420 Card Printer:
Printing and Encoding Magnetic Stripe Cards using an Eltron P420 Card Printer
This section describes how to print and encode magnetic stripe cards using a P420 Card Printer
and should be used in conjunction with the P420 manufacturer's documentation supplied by the
Zebra Technologies Corporation.
Procedure to set up the P420
1. Connect the P420 to a parallel port of the PC.
2. Insert the P420 CD and install the Windows Driver.
3. Select Start > Settings > Printers and Faxes and the card printer should be listed.
4. Right click on the Eltron P420 Card Printer and select the Properties option to display the
Eltron P420 Card Printer Properties window.

5. Select the Device Settings tab and set the With magnetic encoder to Yes.
If encoding is not required, select No.
6. Select the Magnetic encoder settings and then the Properties button to display the
Encoder Settings window.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 224
Other Facilities
7. Select the Restore Defaults button to enable macro processing, start of data to ${, and end
of data to }$.
8. Select the Advanced settings button to display the Advanced Settings window.

9. Specify the following settings:
HiCo/LoCo High or Low (depends on card type)
Encoder position Normal
Encoder type ISO
Track Track 2
Mode ISO2
Density 75bpi (or 210bpi if your reader supports it)
10. Select the Apply button to redisplay the Encoder settings window.
Procedure to test the P420
1. Select Close on the Encoder settings window to redisplay the Device Settings tab.
2. Select Tools and then the Properties button to display the Printer Tools window.
3. Select the Track 2 check box and enter a dummy code in to the data entry field.
4. Insert a card into the card input hopper on the P420 (the magnetic stripe must be on the
underside of the card and towards the back of the P420).
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 225
Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 226
Other Facilities
5. Select the Encode button and the printer should printer the card. If the test is successful,
the card will be ejected into the card output hopper. If test is unsuccessful, the card will be
ejected into the rejected card box.
Procedure to print and encode a card
1. Select Tools > Card Designer and design a magnetic stripe card for a category (e.g. Staff)
using the ID Card Designer.
2. Select the Keyholder module and add a keyholder with a key that has a magnetic stripe
card format and the keycode you require for that card. The keyholder must have the same
category (e.g. Staff) as the designed card.
3. Select Tools > Options > Access Options and specify the magnetic stripe position and
length.
4. Select the Keyholder Details tab and print the keyholder card using the P420. The card will
be printed and encoded with the specified keycode. Batch printing can be performed by
selecting a number of keyholders (all must have magnetic stripe cards) and loading the
appropriate number of cards in the printer.
If only printing the back of cards, encoding will not be performed.
When printing and encoding cards for a keyholder that has multiple keycodes
assigned, only the first keycode in the list will be encoded. All others will be ignored.
It not recommended to print and encode from the ID Card Designer because the
orientation may be incorrect.
10.11 Configure Organisations
10.11.1 Introduction
Multiple Organisation Units allow a customer’s database to be split into logical units for the
purposes of administration. All data from any of the org units is maintained within one database.
Multiple org units are activated by means of additional licensing options. The licenses procured
will control the number of permitted org units.
Upon the introduction of a new license, a new module is added to the system called ‘Guest’.
This allows access to be granted to keyholders from other org units. These keyholders can be
added to the local org unit access groups in order to gain access to the local org unit.
Keyholder name, title and org unit details are shown on the property page (read only), but no
other details are accessible.
An operator can be assigned privilege rights to multiple org units. The system will then allow the
operator to login to any of his privileged org units. The operator can have different operator
templates for each org unit, from “no privilege” with no access rights to “installer” with full
privileges.
A keyholder in an area that is not in his own org unit may require keyholder forgive e.g. an antipassback
lock-out. As a guest, his keyholder record does not appear in the keyholder list at the
org unit site, therefore the forgive operation is available on the ‘Guest’ module. The operator
can simply select the event and hit ‘Forgive’. This can also be done from the event log viewer.
‘Keyholder Search’ is available via a search bar within the Guest option.
‘Key Seek’ also searches guests to the local org unit.
The operator sees all entries for all privileged org units when he uses Alarm Viewer. Maps are
tied to particular org units and do not contain items from separate org units, however, multiple
maps are visible simultaneously without the need to log into each org unit individually.
The alarm/area status panes are partitioned to display their entries by org unit.
The event log viewer shows events for the current org unit as well as any system events not
associated with any particular org unit.
The event log contains a new column for org unit name

10.11.2 Multiple Organisation Units Details
10.11.2.1 License Upgrades
Select Tools > Upgrade License and insert the new code provided. The software must be
restarted for the changes to take effect:
• The Login screen has a new box for “Organisation”, select the required org unit and
enter the appropriate login details.
• The Tools drop-down menu option now includes the new option “Configure
Organisations”, to configure, add or delete org units.
• A new module called ‘Guests’ appears in the Navigator explorer tree
10.11.2.2 Log-in Screen
At the Login screen a new box for “Organisation” appears, with a drop-down menu, allowing
the operator to select which org unit to log into. The box defaults to the option selected during
the operator’s last login.
The Options button is used to hide or reveal the Server name and Organisation boxes.
10.11.2.3 Tools Options
The Tools drop-down menu includes the Configure Organisations option.
• Select Tools > Configure
Organisations and the
Configure Organisations
window is displayed.
10.11.2.4 Edit, Add or Delete Org Units
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 227
Other Facilities
This function enables operators to configure current org units and to add new or delete existing
Org units according to the limits of their license. Changes occur within the Tools menu.
To add/edit an org unit:
1. Select the Add New button or
select the org unit to be edited
and a data entry window is
displayed.
2. The following facilities are then
available:
• Specify the name.
• Specify a description.
• Specify a prefix that will be
added to items to indicate
their org unit.
• Specify a location.
• Select the time zone of the
org unit’s location.
3. Select the OK or Apply button.

To delete an org unit:
1. Select the org unit to be deleted.
2. Select the Delete button.
Non-empty org units cannot be deleted and there must always be one org unit in the system.
10.11.2.5 Guests
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 228
Other Facilities
This option allows keyholders from one org unit to have access to other org units. Access to the
currently-selected org unit is controlled by assigning appropriate access groups to guests.
To display the guest list view:
1. Select the org unit the guest
will be allowed access to.
2. Select the Guest module.
3. Enter search criteria.
4. Select the guest keyholder.
5. Select the Access tab.
6. Select the access groups for
the guest.
10.11.2.6 Operators
It is possible to allocate different administration privileges to operators within the different org
units available.
To specify operators and allocate privileges:
1. Select the Operator
module.
2. Select an operator or
create a new operator.
3. Select the Privileges tab.
4. Select the appropriate
Privilege Template for
each org unit.
5. Select the Add or Update
button.
10.11.2.7 Reports
An operator can only produce reports for the org unit into which he is currently logged.
Some reports may need org unit as one of the report parameters.
10.11.2.8 Alarm Viewer
Alarm Viewer allows a simultaneous view of multiple org units to which an operator has
privilege rights. Every org unit for which the operator has access privileges will be incorporated
into the alarm viewer display.
Multiple maps and multiple pages of video sources are available. It is possible to amend the
view to show only one selected org unit, however, in the event of an alarm occurring, the alarm
viewer automatically defaults to show the appropriate map for the org unit area concerned.
10.11.2.9 Database Back-Up, Archive and Restore
All operators have database back-up privileges, however, if a back-up is initiated then the entire
database for all org units is backed up, not merely the org unit which the operator is currently

Helpfile All Ver 3.22 229
Other Facilities
logged into.
If an operator carries out a database archive restore then the entire database is restored to the
earlier state, not merely the database for the org unit the operator is currently logged into.
10.11.3 Multiple Organisation Units Configuration
10.11.3.1 User Interface
Entities from foreign org units are prefixed by the org unit name or prefix.
10.11.3.2 Database Download
Controller downloads include keys from foreign org units with the potential for access. This
means any guest who is allocated an access group will have his keys downloaded to the
controllers for that org unit regardless of whether access is actually required.
10.11.4 Multiple Organisation Units Configure Actions
10.11.4.1 Configuring Org Units
• When adding a new organisation unit, the properties are copied from the current org
unit, e.g. custom labels, extra info, token formats, alarm settings.
• When adding a new organisation unit the current operator and installer are given full
privileges.
• It is possible to delete an organisation unit which has an empty database, but not current
org unit. It is not possible to delete an organisation unit with any data saved into it.
• It is possible to change organisation unit details such as name, description, prefix and
location.
• Duplicate and blank organisation unit names are not allowed.
• Operator privilege is respected, it is not possible to view or delete organisation units for
which the operator has no privilege. It is not possible to add an organisation unit unless
the operator has ‘add’ privileges in the current organisation unit.
• Discard (Cancel) gives the appropriate warning if details have been changed and
unsaved.
10.11.4.2 Login
• When an operator with 'no privilege' to an organisation unit tries to log into the system an
appropriate error is displayed and the operator is blocked.
• Guards log into guard view for each appropriate organisation unit, i.e. Event Log Viewer
or Alarm Viewer, showing the appropriate data for the logged in org unit.
• The User Interface remembers the last record accessed for each individual organisation
unit.
• When the server is unavailable, or the user types an invalid server name, the system
remains responsive and displays a warning triangle next to the server name. The
organisation unit list becomes unavailable. An error is displayed when the user attempts
to login.
• When multiple organisation units are licensed, the login and logout events include a
drop-down list of the available organisation unit names.
• Session timeouts do not appear in the event log, but are displayed to the user.
10.11.4.3 Operator Property Page
• Copy operator copies template privileges for all org units.
• When the operator changes the privileges of his own account in the current organisation
unit, the user interface forces the system to close so that the operator must login again.
The operator may change privileges in other organisation units without the logout.

10.11.4.4 Event Log Viewer
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 230
Other Facilities
• Events for the current organisation unit are displayed, plus any system events which are
not associated with any organisation unit.
• Simple alarms are reported for the current organisation unit only.
• ‘Show details’ and ‘Navigate To’ functionality works for all entity types.
• The ‘Navigate To’ function will take the user to either the keyholder page for keyholders
in the current organisation unit, or the guests’ page for keyholders in other organisation
units.
• The ‘Show Details’ function will show either the keyholder page for keyholders in the
current organisation unit, or the guests’ page for keyholders in other organisation units.
10.11.4.5 Guests
• The operator can assign local access groups to ‘Guest’ records provided he has
‘keyholder’ privilege in the local organisation unit.
• Keyholders who have access to other organisation units can be deleted.
• The guests’ list supports multiple select and multiple updating (like keyholders).
• Search results count appears in the status bar.
• Key seek will navigate to the guests’ page, if the required key is held by a guest, but only
if the operator has privilege to view keyholders in the other organisation unit.
• If key seek criteria matches an entry in 2 organisation units, the local organisation unit is
always favoured.
10.11.4.6 Hardware
• Guest keys are downloaded to controller.
• When probing for 500s or IP controllers, if the IP address is in use by hardware in
another organisation unit the user interface makes this clear, rather than allowing
multiple assignment.
• When checking that a dialup channel has a unique phone number, the system checks
channels in all organisation units.
• Modems are available to all organisation units and can be used by channels on different
organisation units.
10.11.4.7 Alarm Viewer
• Alarm points are qualified by organisation unit prefix or name, when there are multiple
org units.
• Events / Alarms list shows records for all organisation units which the operator is
privileged to see. There is a column showing organisation unit name.
• Video sources are shown for all organisation units which the operator is privileged to
see.
• Alarms in any of the displayed organisation units are handled appropriately and can be
acknowledged.
• Alarms not assigned to any of the displayed organisation units are not shown.
10.11.4.8 Miscellaneous
• Reports are organisation unit aware i.e. data from other organisation units is not
exposed to unprivileged operators.
• Data imports into the current organisation unit only.
• Duplicate names for entities are allowed if the entities are in different organisation units.

• Restoring a database restores all data, not just the current organisation unit data.
• Event To Action is limited to entities in the current organisation unit only.
• Licensing limits apply to the total number of entities across all organisation units.
• SWB hardware can only be added to any organisation unit which does not have weekly
time profiles.
• The current organisation unit name appears on the status bar of the application.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 231
Other Facilities

10.12 Audit Trail
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 232
Other Facilities
The Audit Trail module gives the ability to track changes made to the administration system. A
search can be specified to determine what changes an operator had made to items (e.g.
keyholders) over a specified time period.
To display an audit trail report:
1. Select Tools > Audit Trail or select Audit
Trail in the Explorer bar and the Audit
Trail Parameters window is displayed.
2. Select a Start Date and End Date for the
search.
3. Select all operators or an Operator from
the drop-down list.
4. Select all items or an Item from the dropdown
list.
5. Select the OK button and the Audit
Report window is displayed.
6. Different pages of the report can be
displayed by selecting the Next and
Previous buttons.
7. The report can be refreshed by selecting
the Refresh button
8. If required the report can be printed by
selecting the Print button.
9. A new search can be specified by
selecting the Parameters button.
10. The report can be exported to Crystal
Reports by selecting the Export button.

11. Error Messages
If the error message does not give sufficient information to correct the error, please use our
knowledge database: www.pactechinfo.co.uk.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 233
Error Messages